Top Banner
2005
247
Welcome message from author
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
Page 1: XG350_2005.pdf

2005

xgflhma-11.p65 6/16/04, 3:14 PM1

Page 2: XG350_2005.pdf

A010A02A-AAT

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI VEHICLE

o New Vehicle 60 Months/60,000 Miles Limited Warrantyo New Vehicle 120 Months/100,000 Miles Limited Powertrain Warranty (Original owner only)o Anti-Perforation Limited Warrantyo Emission Defect Warranty - Federal Vehicleo California Emission Control System Warranty (if applicable)o Emission Performance Warranty - Federal Vehicleo Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty

NOTE:Detailed warranty information is provided in your Hyundai Owner's Handbook.

A020A01A-AAT

RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE

The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 5. As the owner, it is your responsibilityto see that all maintenance operations specified by the manufacturer are carried out at the appropriate intervals.When the vehicle is used in severe driving conditions, more frequent maintenance is required for some operations.Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditions are also included in Section 5.

xgflhma-0.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM2

Page 3: XG350_2005.pdf

HXGS001

OWNER'S MANUAL

A030A01L-AAT

OperationMaintenanceSpecifications

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at anytime so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all Hyundai XG 350 models and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment.As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

xgflhma-0.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM3

Page 4: XG350_2005.pdf

A070A01A-AAT

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safetyor durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle.Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportationand other federal or state agencies.

A080A01S-AAT

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible for animproperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For thisreason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundaidealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.

!

xgflhma-0.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM4

Page 5: XG350_2005.pdf

A040A01A-AAT

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people whodrive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of whichwe're very proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you readit carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundaidealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that maybe required.

A050A05A-AAT

HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY

Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leavethe manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

CAUTION:Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do notmeet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifica-tions listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual and which also appearin the Service Station Information on the back cover of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2004 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored inany retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai MotorCompany.

!

xgflhma-0.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM5

Page 6: XG350_2005.pdf

A090A01A-AAT

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.These titles indicate the following:

WARNING:This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other persons ifthe warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTION:This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the caution isnot heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

NOTE:This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

!

!

xgflhma-0.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM6

Page 7: XG350_2005.pdf

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 5

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

10

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

xgflhma-0.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM7

Page 8: XG350_2005.pdf

B250A02L-AAT

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

B250A02L-A

xgflhma-0.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM8

Page 9: XG350_2005.pdf

1. Cruise Control Main Switch 2. Traction Control Switch 3. Panel Brightness Control Knob (Rheostat

Switch) 4. Multi-Function Light Switch 5. Horn and Driver's Airbag 6. Cruise Control Switch 7. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 8. Ignition Switch 9. Hazard Warning Switch10. Digital Clock

11. Audio System (If installed)12. Passenger's Airbag13. Hood Release Lever14. Parking Brake Release Lever/Parking Brake (Foot

type)15. Steering Wheel Tilt Lever16. Heater/Air Conditioning Control Panel17. Shift Lever18. Ashtray19. Accessory Box20. Glove Box

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster noron the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster,instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto theseareas, wash them with water immediately.

!

xgflhma-0.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM9

Page 10: XG350_2005.pdf

YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE

B255A01L-AAT

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

* More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 1-42

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

SRS (Airbag) Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)

Seat Belt Reminder Light and Chime

High Beam Indicator Light

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light

Charging System Warning Light

Door Ajar Warning Light and Chime

Trunk Lid Open Warning Light

Front Fog Indicator Light

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

ABS Service Reminder Indicator

Traction Control Indicator Light

Malfunction Indicator Light

Cruise Indicator Light

Stop/Tail Light Failure Warning Light

xgflhma-0.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM10

Page 11: XG350_2005.pdf

A100A03A-AAT

Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same partsused by Hyundai Motor Company to manu-facture vehicles. They are designed andtested for the optimum safety, performance,and reliability to our customers.

2. Why should you use genuine parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineered andbuilt to meet rigid manufacturing require-ments. Using imitation, counterfeit or usedsalvage parts is not covered under theHyundai New Vehicle Limited Warranty orany other Hyundai warranty. In addition, anydamage to or failure of Genuine HyundaiParts caused by the installation or failure of

an imitation, counterfeit or used salvage partis not covered by any Hyundai Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are purchasingHyundai Genuine Parts?

Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts Logo onthe package (see below).

Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to the UnitedStates are packaged with labels written onlyin English.

Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold throughauthorized Hyundai Dealerships.

To find the closest authorized dealer call1-800-826-CARS

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

A100A03L

xgflhma-0.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM11

Page 12: XG350_2005.pdf

A000A01A-AAT

This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next owner.

OWNER'S I.D.

ORIGINAL OWNER

ADDRESS

CITY STATE ZIP CODE

DELIVERY DATE

(Date Sold to Original Retail purchaser)

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

CITY STATE ZIP CODE

xgflhma-0.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM12

Page 13: XG350_2005.pdf

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1Fuel Recommendations ................................................ 1-2Breaking In Your New Hyundai ..................................... 1-3Keys .............................................................................. 1-3Door Locks (Theft-Alarm System) ......................... 1-4, 1-7Power Windows ............................................................ 1-9Seat (Power Seat) ............................................. 1-10, 1-13I.M.S (Integrated Memory System) ............................. 1-14Seat Belt ..................................................................... 1-17Child Restraint System ............................................... 1-24Supplemental Restraint (Airbag) System .................... 1-31Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ...................... 1-38Warning and Indicator Light ........................................ 1-40Multi-function Light Switch .......................................... 1-46Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch ............................... 1-48Trip Computer ............................................................. 1-51Sunroof ....................................................................... 1-55Mirror ........................................................................... 1-60Homelink Mirror ........................................................... 1-62Hood Release ............................................................. 1-72Cruise Control ............................................................. 1-75Heating and Cooling Control ....................................... 1-78Stereo Sound System ................................................. 1-93Antenna ..................................................................... 1-118

1

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM1

Page 14: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

2 FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS

B010A02L

CAUTION:Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Limited War-ranty may not cover damage to the fuelsystem and any performance problems thatare caused by the use of fuels containingmethanol or fuels containing MTBE (MethylTertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxy-gen Content 2.7% weight.)

B010B01A-AAT

What About Gasohol?

Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleaded gasolineand 10% ethanol or grain alcohol) may be usedin your Hyundai. However, if your engine devel-ops driveability problems, the use of 100%unleaded gasoline is recommended. Fuels withunspecified quantities of alcohol, or alcoholsother than ethanol, should not be used.

B010A03A-AAT

Use Unleaded Gasoline

Unleaded gasoline with a Pump OctaneRating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91)or higher must be used in your Hyundai.

If leaded gasoline is used, it will cause thecatalytic converter to become ineffective andthe emission control system to malfunction.This can also result in increased maintenanceexpense.

To avoid accidental use of leaded fuel, the largernozzle used with leaded gasoline at servicestations cannot be inserted into the fuel tankopening of your Hyundai.

B010C01A-AAT

Use of MTBE

Hyundai recommends that fuels containingMTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0%vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) should notbe used in your Hyundai.Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol. (OxygenContent 2.7% weight) may reduce vehicle per-formance and produce vapor lock or hardstarting.

B010D01A-AAT

Do Not Use Methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) shouldnot be used in your Hyundai. This type of fuelcan reduce vehicle performance and damagecomponents of the fuel system.

!

CAUTION:o Do not "TOP-OFF" after the first nozzle

shut off when refueling.o The fuel cap must be tightened at least

3 clicks, otherwise " " light may illu-minate.

UNLEADEDFUEL ONLY

!

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM2

Page 15: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

3KEYBREAKING IN YOUR NEW HYUNDAI

B010E01A-AAT

Gasolines for Cleaner Air

To help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundai rec-ommends that you use gasolines treated withdetergent additives, which help prevent depositformation in the engine. These gasolines willhelp the engine run cleaner and enhance per-formance of the Emission Control System.

B010F01A-AAT

Operation in Foreign CountriesIf you are going to drive your Hyundai in anothercountry, be sure to:

o Observe all regulations regarding registra-tion and insurance.

o Determine that acceptable fuel is available.

B020A01S-AAT

During the First 1,200 Miles (2,000 Km)

No formal "break-in" procedure is required withyour new Hyundai. However, you can contrib-ute to the economical operation and durability ofyour Hyundai by observing the following recom-mendations during the first 1,200 miles (2,000km).

o Don't drive faster than 55 MPH (88 km/h).o While driving, keep your engine speed (rpm,

or revolutions per minute) between 2,000rpm and 4,000 rpm.

o Use moderate acceleration. Don't startquickly or depress the accelerator pedalfully.

o For the first 200 miles (300 km), try to avoidhard stops.

o Don't lug the engine (in other words, don'tdrive so slowly in too high a gear that theengine "bucks"-shift to a lower gear).

o Whether going fast or slow, vary your speedfrom time to time.

o Don't let the engine idle longer than 3 minutesat one time.

o Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200 miles(2,000 km) of operation.

B030A01Y-AAT

KEYS

For greater convenience, your Hyundai hastwo master keys and a sub key. The masterkeys will open all locks on your vehicle. The subkey will only function in the ignition and the doorlocks.

Leaving your sub key with a parking attendantwill ensure that your vehicle's trunk, trunk lidrelease, glovebox compartment and rear trunkaccess may not be unlocked in your absence.

NOTE:Before leaving your sub key with a parkingattendant, make sure that the lock levers ofthe rear seat back lock and the trunk lid lockare switched to the "LOCK" position.

HXG116Master key Sub key

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM3

Page 16: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

4 DOORILLUMINATED IGNITION SWITCH

!

B030C01Y-AAT B040A01Y-AAT

DOOR LOCKS

Whenever a door is opened, the ignition switchwill be illuminated for your convenience, pro-vided the ignition switch is not in the "ON"position.The light will go off approximately 10 secondsafter closing the door or when the ignition switchis turned on.

B030C01L

WARNING:o Unlocked doors can be dangerous. Be-

fore you drive away (especially if thereare children in the car), be sure that all thedoors are securely closed and locked sothat the doors cannot be opened fromthe inside. This helps ensure that thedoors will not be opened accidentally.Also, when combined with the properuse of seat belts, locking the doors helpskeep occupants from being ejected fromthe car in case of an accident.

o Before opening the door, always look forand avoid oncoming traffic.

o In case of accident, the door is unlockedautomatically.

B030B01A-AAT

Record Your Key Number

A code number is stamped on the number platethat came with the keys to your Hyundai. Thiskey number plate should not be left with the keysbut kept in a safe place, not in the vehicle. Thekey number should also be recorded in a placewhere it can be found in an emergency.If you need additional keys, or if you should loseyour keys, your authorized Hyundai dealer canmake new keys if you can supply the keynumber.

B030B01L

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM4

Page 17: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

5

B040C03L

UNLOCKLOCK

HXG018

B040B01A-AAT

Locking and unlocking front doors with akey

B040C02Y-AAT

Locking From the Outside

The doors can be locked without a key. To lockthe doors, first push the inside lock switch to the"LOCK" position so that the red mark on theswitch is not visible, then close the door.The door will not lock if the key is left in the ignitionswitch when the front doors close. This isnormal.

NOTE:o When locking the door this way, be care-

ful not to lock the door with the ignitionkey left in the vehicle.

o To prevent against theft, always removethe ignition key, close all windows, andlock all doors and the trunk lid whenleaving your vehicle unattended.

B040D02S-AAT

Locking From the Inside

o To lock the doors from the inside, simplyclose the door and push the lock switch to the"LOCK" position. When this is done, neitherthe outside nor the passenger's inside doorhandle can be used.

o The driver's door can be opened by pullingthe inside door handle even if the lock switchis depressed.

NOTE:When the door is locked, the red mark on theswitch is not visible.

o The door can be locked or unlocked with akey.

o Lock the door by turning the key toward thefront of the vehicle and unlock it by turning thekey toward the rear.

HXGS226

LOCK

UNLOCK

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM5

Page 18: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

6 KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEMCENTRAL DOOR LOCKS

B040G02L-AAT

The central door locking switch is located on thedriver's arm rest. It is operated by depressingeither the front or rear of the door lock switch.

NOTE:o When pushing the front portion of the

driver's door lock switch, all vehicle doorswill lock.If any door is open when the switch isdepressed, the door will remain lockedwhen closed.

o When pushing the rear portion of theswitch, all vehicle doors will unlock.

B040G02L-1

LOCKUNLOCK

B070F01L-AAT

Locking doors

1. Close all doors.2. Push the " " button on the transmitter.3. All doors will lock and the turn signal lights will

blink once to indicate that the system isarmed.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the " " button on the transmitter.2. All doors will unlock and the turn signal lights

will blink twice to indicate that the system isdisarmed.

Releasing the trunk lid

Push the " " button on the transmitter forlonger than 1 second.

B040E04A-AAT

CHILD-PROTECTOR REAR DOOR LOCK

Your Hyundai is equipped with a "child-protec-tor" rear door lock assembly. When the lockmechanism is engaged, the rear door cannot beopened from the inside. Its use is recommendedwhenever there are small children in the rearseat.

To engage the child-protector feature so thedoor cannot be opened from the inside, movethe child-protector lever to the " " position andclose the door. Move the lever to the " "position when normal door operation is desired.

If you wish to be able to open the door from theoutside, the outside door handle will functionnormally.

B040E03L

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM6

Page 19: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

7THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

B070A01S-AAT

(If Installed)

This system is designed to provide protectionfrom unauthorized entry into the car. This sys-tem is operated in three stages : the first is the"Armed" stage, the second is the "Alarm" stage,and the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-gered, the system provides an audible alarm.

B070B03Y-AAT

Armed Stage

Park the car and stop the engine. Arm thesystem as described below.

1) Remove the ignition key from the ignitionswitch.

2) Make sure that the engine hood and trunk lidare locked.

3) Lock the doors using the transmitter of thekeyless entry system.

After completion of the steps above, the turnsignal light will blink once to indicate that thesystem is armed.

NOTE:1) If any door, trunk lid or engine hood

remains open, the system will not bearmed.

2) If this happens, rearm the system asdescribed above.

CAUTION:Do not arm the system until all passengershave left the car. If the system is armed whilea passenger(s) remains in the car, the alarmmay be activated when the remainingpassenger(s) leaves the car.

B070C03L-GAT

Alarm Stage

The alarm will be activated if any of the followingoccurs while the car is parked and the systemis armed.

HXGS123

!

CAUTION:Avoid trying to start the engine while thesystem is armed.

!

1) A front or rear door is opened without usingthe transmitter.

2) The trunk lid is opened without using thetransmitter.

3) The engine hood is opened.

The turn signal lights will blink continuously andthe siren will sound for 27 seconds. (EC only/Except E.C: This happens 3 times). To turn offthe system, unlock the door or trunk lid with thetransmitter.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM7

Page 20: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

8

B070E02HP-GAT

Replacing the battery

When the transmitter's battery begins to getweak, it may take several pushes on the buttonto lock or unlock the doors, and the LED will notlight. Replace the battery as soon as possible.

Battery type : CR2032

Replacement instructions:

1. Carefully separate the case with a bladescrewdriver as shown in the illustration.

HEF-192A

Screwdriver

CAUTION:Only the transmitter can disarm the armedstage. If the transmitter does not disarm thesystem, it is necessary to take the followingsteps;

1. Unlock the door with the key, which willcause the alarm to be activated.

2. Insert the key in the ignition key cylinderand turn the ignition key to "ON" posi-tion.

3. Wait for 30 seconds.

After completing the steps above, the sys-tem will be disarmed.

!

HXG117

UNLOCKLOCK

TRUNK

B070D04L-AAT

Disarmed Stage

The system will be disarmed when the followingstep is taken:

The driver's or passenger's door is unlocked bydepressing the " " button on the transmitter.After completion of the steps above, the turnsignal lights will blink twice to indicate that thesystem is disarmed.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM8

Page 21: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

9

2. Remove the old battery from the case andnote the polarity. Make sure the polarity ofthe new battery is the same(+side facingdown), then insert it in the transmitter.

HEF-193

Battery

POWER WINDOWS

B060A03Y-AAT

The power windows operate when the ignitionkey is in the "ON" position. The main switchesare located on the driver's armrest and controlthe front and rear windows on both sides of thevehicle. The windows may be opened by de-pressing the appropriate window switch andclosed by pulling up the switch. To open thewindow on the driver's side, press the switch(1)halfway down. The window moves as long asthe switch is operated. To fully open the driver'swindow automatically, press the switch fullydown. In automatic operation, the window willfully open even if you let go of the switch. To stopat the desired opening, pull up and release theswitch.

In order to prevent operation of the passangerfront and rear windows, a window lock switch(2)is provided on the armrest of the driver's door.To disable the power windows, press the win-dow lock switch. To return to normal operation,press the window lock switch a second time.

NOTE:The power windows can be operated for 30seconds after the ignition key is turned tothe "ACC" or "LOCK" positions, or removedfrom the ignition switch.If the front doors are opened during this 30second period, the power windows can nolonger be operated without the ignition keyturned to the "ON" position.

HXG129-1

OpenClose

HXG025-1

(1)

(2)

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM9

Page 22: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

10 SEATS

!

B080A01A-AAT

ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATS

WARNING:Never attempt to adjust the seat while thevehicle is moving. This could result in lossof control or an accident which may causedeath, serious injury, or property damage.

B080B01L-AAT

Adjusting Seat Forward and Rearward

To move the seat toward the front or rear, pullthe lock release lever upward. This will releasethe seat on its track so you can move it forwardor rearward to the desired position. When youfind the position you want, release the lever andslide the seat forward or rearward on its trackuntil it locks into the desired position and cannotbe moved further.

HXG179

! WARNING:To ensure the seat is locked securely, at-tempt to move the seat forward or rearwardwithout using the control knob.

! WARNING:(1)Be careful that someone's head, hands

and body are not trapped by a closingwindow.

(2)Never try to operate the main switch onthe driver's door and the individual doorwindow switch in opposing directionsat the same time. If this is done, thewindow will stop and cannot be openedor closed.

(3)Do not leave children alone in the car.Always remove the ignition key for theirsafety.

HXG029

CloseOpen

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM10

Page 23: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

11

!

HXG103

B080C02A-AAT

Adjusting Seatback Angle

To recline the seatback, lean forward to takeyour weight off it, then pull up on the reclinercontrol lever at the outside edge of the seat. Nowlean back until the desired seatback angle isachieved. To lock the seatback into position,release the recliner control lever.

WARNING:To minimize risk of severe injury in theevent of a collision or a sudden stop, boththe driver and passenger seatbacks shouldalways be in an upright position while thevehicle is in motion. The protection pro-vided by the seat belts and airbags in afrontal collision may be reduced signifi-cantly when the seatbacks are reclined.There is greater risk that the driver andpassenger will slide under the seat beltwhich may result in serious injury if a crashoccurs when the seatbacks are reclined.The seat belt and airbags cannot provideproper protection to an occupant if the seatback is reclined.

B080D01L-GAT

Adjustable Headrests

Headrests are designed to help reduce the riskof neck injuries.To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lower it, pushit down while pressing the lock knob. If equippedwith a horizontally adjustable type of headrest,pull on the top.

HXG200J

Lock Knob

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM11

Page 24: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

12

B090C01Y-AAT

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment(Driver's Seat Only)

Move the front portion of the control knob up ordown to raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion. Move the rear portion of the controlknob up or down to raise or lower the rear partof the seat cushion.

HXG106! WARNING:o For maximum effectiveness in case of an

accident the headrest should be ad-justed so the top of the headrest is at thesame height as the top of the occupant'sears. For this reason, the use of a cush-ion that holds the body away from theseatback should not be recommended.

o Do not operate vehicle with the head-rests removed as injury to the occupantsmay occur in the event of an accident.Headrests may provide protectionagainst neck injuries when properly ad-justed.

B080G01L

B080E01L-AAT

Lumbar Support Control

To adjust the lumbar support, turn the handle onthe outboard or left side of the seat. To increasethe amount of lumbar support, pull the leverforward. To decrease it, push the lever towardthe rear.

1. Minimum support2. Maximum support

HXG108

2

1

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM12

Page 25: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

13POWER SEAT

!

B090B01L-AAT

Adjusting Seat Forward and Rearward

Pull the control knob forward or backward tomove the seat forward or backward to thedesired position. Release the knob and then theseat will remain at that position.

1. Seatback Reclining Control Knob2. Seat Cushion Forward, Rearward and Height

Adjusting Control Knob

B090A03L-AAT

(If Installed)

The front seat can be adjusted appropriately byusing the control knobs on the left side of theseat. Before driving, adjust the seat to theproper position so as to easily control thesteering wheel, pedals and switches on theinstrument panel.

CAUTION:Do not operate two knobs at the same time.

WARNING:o Never attempt to adjust the seat while

the vehicle is moving. This could resultin loss of control or an accident causingdeath, serious injury, or property dam-age.

o Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close tothe airbag.

!

HXG180

1

2

B090C01Y-AAT

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment

Move the front portion of the control knob up ordown to raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion. Move the rear portion of the controlknob up or down to raise or lower the rear partof the seat cushion.

HXG182

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM13

Page 26: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

14

B090E05L-AAT

I.M.S (Integrated Memory System)(If Installed)

The Integrated Memory System controls arelocated on the driver's door. After adjusting theposition of the driver's seat and outside rear-view mirrors, use the I.M.S to memorize them.Two different driving position profiles can beentered in the I.M.S. If you turn the ignition keyto the "ON" position, the memorized position isadjusted automatically.

HXG212

!B090D01Y-AAT

Adjusting Seatback Angle

HXG181

Rotate the upper portion of the control knobforward or backward to adjust the seatback tothe desired position. Release the control knoband the seatback will remain in that position.

WARNING:To minimize the risk of personal injury inthe event of a collision or a sudden stop,both the driver's and passenger's seatbacksshould remain in an upright position whilethe car is in motion. The protection pro-vided by the seat belts and airbags may bereduced significantly when the seatbacksare reclined. There is a greater risk that theseat occupants will slide under the seatbeltresulting in serious injury if a crash occurswhen the seatbacks are reclined. The seatbelt cannot provide full protection to anoccupant if the seatback is reclined.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM14

Page 27: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

15

Reverse Parking Aid Function

When the "AUTO" button is "ON" and thevehicle is moving backward, the outside rear-view mirror(s) will move downward to aid re-verse parking safely. According to the positionof the outside rearview mirror switch knob, theoutside rearview mirror(s) will operate as fol-lows.

L : When the remote control outside rearviewmirror switch knob is selected to the "L"position, both of the outside rearview mir-rors will move downward.

R : When the remote control outside rearviewmirror switch knob is selected to the "R"position, only the passenger's outside rear-view mirror will move downward.

Neutral :When the remote control outside rear-view mirror switch knob is placed inthe middle position, the outside rear-view mirrors will not operate while thevehicle is moving backward.

NOTE:When the ignition key is in the "LOCK"position, the selector lever is moved to anyposition except "R" position, or the remotecontrol outside rearview mirror switch knobis placed in the middle position, the outsiderearview mirrors will automatically revert tooriginal position.

! CAUTION:In the following conditions, the I.M.S willnot operate.1. When the "1" or "2" button is not pushed

within five seconds.2. When the seat is being adjusted.3. When the "STOP" button is pushed.4. While the vehicle is moving.

To activate the memorized position

When you push button "1" or "2", the drivingposition will be automatically adjusted to theposition recorded for that button.

To memorize driving position

1. Turn the ignition key "ON".2. Adjust the driver's seat and outside rearview

mirrors to the desired position.3. Push the "M" button on the I.M.S until the

signal beeps.4. Within five seconds, push button "1" or "2"

until the signal beeps twice. The beep soundsmean that the positions are memorized in theI.M.S.

"AUTO" button function

When the "AUTO" button is "ON", the systemwill move the driver's seat forward or rearwardso you can comfortably enter and exit thevehicle.

o It will move driver's seat rearward when theignition key is pulled out.

o It will move driver's seat forward when theignition key is inserted.

Note:In order for the "AUTO" functions to work,the parking brake must be applied.

CAUTION:In the following conditions, the "AUTO"mode will not operate.

1. When AUTO button is in "OFF".2. When the seat is being adjusted.3. When the shift lever is positioned in

other than "P" position.

!

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM15

Page 28: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

16

!

FOLDING REAR SEATBACKSSEAT WARMER

B100A02Y-AAT

(If Installed)

The seat warmer is provided to warm the frontseats during cold weather. With the ignition keyin the "ON" position, push either of the switchesto warm the driver's seat or the passenger'sseat.During mild weather or under conditions wherethe operation of the seat warmer is not needed,keep the switches in the "OFF" position.

Driver's seat

HXG620Passenger's seat

B110A01L-A

B110A01L-AAT

o To unlock the seatback, depress theseatback locking button, then pull forward onthe seatback panel.

o When you return the seatback to its uprightposition, always be sure it has locked intoposition by pulling and pushing on the top ofthe seatback.

! WARNING:The purpose of the folding rear seatbacksis to allow you to carry longer objects thancould otherwise be accommodated. Neverallow passengers to sit on top of the foldeddown seatback. While the car is moving asthis is not a proper seating position and noseat belts are available for use. This couldresult in serious injury or death in case of anaccident or sudden stop. Objects carriedon the folded down seatback should notextend higher than the top of the frontseats. This could allow cargo to slide for-ward and cause injury or damage duringsudden stops.

B110A02L-A

WARNING:It is recommended that the seat heater notbe used when elderly people or people whoare ill occupy the seat. Also, do not use theseat warmer if the occupant is sleeping.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM16

Page 29: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

17SEAT BELT

!

B150A02A-AAT

SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS

WARNING:All occupants of the vehicle must wear theirseat belts at all times. Note that this vehicleis equipped with a Supplemental Restraint(Airbag) System as discussed beginningon page 1-31. The seat belts must be usedin conjunction with the supplementalairbag system. State laws require that someor all occupants of the vehicle use seatbelts. The possibility of increased injury orseverity of injury in an accident will beincreased if this elementary safety precau-tion is not observed.

B120A01Y-AAT

REAR SEATBACK SAFETY LOCK(If Installed)

If the rear seatback lock lever (located on thebackside of the rear seatback) is in the "LOCK"position when the rear seatbacks are closed, itwill not be possible to fold the rear seatback byusing the release lock lever. In this instance,move the lock lever to the "FREE" position andfold the rear seatback. The rear seatback locklever is designed to provide protection fromunauthorized entry into the trunk.

FREE

LOCK

B120A03L

B140A03L

B140A01S-AAT

REAR SEAT WARNING

For the safety of all passengers, luggage orother cargo should not be piled higher than thetop of the seatback. In addition, do not placeobjects on the rear shelf as they may moveforward during braking or in an accident andstrike vehicle passengers.

!

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM17

Page 30: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

18

!

B150B04Y-AAT

Infant or Small ChildAll 50 states have child restraint laws. Youshould be aware of the specific requirements inyour state. Child and/or infant safety seats mustbe properly placed and installed in the rear seat.Information about the use of these restraintsbegins on page 1-24.

WARNING:Every person in your vehicle needs to beproperly restrained at all times, includinginfants and children. In a collision, an unre-strained child can become a "missile" in-side the car. The force required to hold achild on your lap could be so great that youcould not hold the child. Any child riding inthe vehicle should always be in a properrestraint in the rear seat of the vehicle.

NOTE:Small children are best protected from in-jury in an accident when properly restrainedin the rear seat by a child restraint systemthat meets the requirements of the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards. Beforebuying any child restraint system, makesure that it has a label certifying that itmeets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

B150C02A-AAT

Larger Children

Children who are too large for child restraintsystems should always occupy the rear seatand use the available lap/shoulder belts. The lapportion should be fastened snug on the hips andas low as possible. Check belt fit periodically. Achild's squirming could put the belt out of posi-tion. Children are afforded the most safety in theevent of an accident when they are restrainedby a proper restraint system in the rear seat. Ifa larger child (over age 13) must be seated inthe front seat, the child should be securelyrestrained by the available lap/shoulder belt andthe seat should be placed in the rearmostposition. Children under the age of 13 should berestrained securely in the rear seat. NEVERplace a child under the age of 13 in the front seat.NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the frontseat of a vehicle.

B150D01A-AAT

Pregnant Women

The use of a seat belt is recommended forpregnant women to lessen the chance of injuryin an accident. When a seat belt is used, the lapbelt portion should be placed as low and snuglyas possible on the hips, not across the abdo-men. For specific recommendations, consult aphysician.

B150E01A-AAT

Injured Person

A seat belt should be used when an injuredperson is being transported. When this is nec-essary, you should consult a physician forrecommendations.

B150F01A-AAT

One Person Per Belt

Two people (including children) should neverattempt to use a single seat belt. This couldincrease the severity of injuries in case of anaccident.

dard 213. The restraint must be appropriatefor your child's height and weight. Checkthe label on the child restraint for thisinformation. See page 1-24.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM18

Page 31: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

19

!

!

B160A01A-AAT

CARE OF SEAT BELTS

Seat belt systems should never be disassembledor modified. In addition, care should be taken toassure that seat belts and belt hardware are notdamaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

WARNING:When you return the rear seatback to itsupright position after the rear seatback wasfolded down, be careful not to damage theseat belt webbing or buckle. Be sure thatthe webbing or buckle does not get caughtor pinched in the rear seat.

B160B01A-AAT

Periodic Inspection

It is recommended that all seat belts be in-spected periodically for wear or damage of anykind. Parts of the system that are damagedshould be replaced as soon as possible.

B160C01A-AAT

Keep Belts Clean and Dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If beltsbecome dirty, they can be cleaned by using amild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye,strong detergents or abrasives should not beused because they may damage and weakenthe fabric.

B160D01A-AAT

When to Replace Seat Belts

Entire in-use seat belt assembly or assembliesshould be replaced if the vehicle has beeninvolved in an accident. This should be doneeven if no damage is visible. Additional ques-tions concerning seat belt operation should bedirected to your Hyundai Dealer.

WARNING:Sitting in a reclined position or lying downwhen your vehicle is in motion can be dan-gerous. Even if you buckle up, your seatbelts can't do their job when you're reclined.The shoulder belt can't do its job becauseit won't be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crashyou could go into it with great force, receiv-ing serious neck or other injuries.The lap belt can't do its job either. In a crashthe belt could go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be applied there, notat your strong pelvic bones.This could cause serious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright.Then sit back in the seat and wear your seatbelt properly.

B150G01A-AAT

Do Not Lie Down

To reduce the chance of injuries in the event ofan accident and to achieve maximum effective-ness of the restraint system, all passengersshould be sitting up and the front seats shouldbe in an upright position when the car is moving.A seat belt cannot provide proper protection ifthe person is lying down in the rear seat or if thefront seat is in a reclined position.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM19

Page 32: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

20

!

B170A01L-GAT

HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATSHOULDER BELT

B170A01L

You can adjust the height of the shoulder beltanchor to one of the 4 positions for maximumcomfort and safety.If the height of the adjusting seat belt is too nearyour neck, you will not be getting the mosteffective protection. The shoulder portion shouldbe adjusted so that it lies across your chest andmidway over your shoulder nearest the doorand not your neck.To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor,lower or raise the height adjuster into an appro-priate position. To raise the height adjuster, pullit up. To lower it, push it down while pressing theheight adjuster button.

WARNING:o The height adjuster must be in the locked

position when the vehicle is moving.o The misadjustment of height of the

shoulder belt could reduce the effective-ness of the seat belt in a crash.

B180A01L-AAT

SEAT BELT-Driver's 3-Point System withEmergency Locking Retractor:To Fasten Your Belt

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractorand insert the metal tab into the buckle. Therewill be an audible "click" when the tab locks intothe buckle.The seat belt automatically adjusts to the properlength only after the lap belt portion is adjustedmanually so that it fits snugly around your hips.If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, thebelt will extend and let you move around. If thereis a sudden stop or impact, however, the belt willlock into position. It will also lock if you try to leanforward too quickly.

B180A01L

Release the button to lock the anchor intoposition. Try sliding the height adjuster to makesure that it has locked into the position.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM20

Page 33: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

21

the seat belt operates in the same way as thedriver's seat belt (Emergency Locking Retrac-tor Type). It automatically adjusts to the properlength only after the lap belt portion of the seatbelt is adjusted manually so that it fits snuglyaround your hips. When the seat belt is fullyextended from the retractor to allow the instal-lation of a child restraint system, the seat beltoperation changes to allow the belt to retract, butnot to extend. (Automatic Locking RetractorType). See page 1-27.

NOTE:Although the combination retractor pro-vides the same level of protection for seatedpassengers in either emergency or auto-matic locking modes, it is recommendedthat seated passengers use the emergencylocking feature for improved convenience.The automatic locking function is intendedto facilitate child restraint installation. Toconvert from the automatic locking featureto the emergency locking operation mode,allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully re-tract.

WARNING:o For maximum restraint system protec-

tion, the seat belts must always be usedwhenever the car is moving.

o Seat belts are most effective whenseatbacks are in the upright position.

o Children must always be seatbelted inthe rear seats. Never allow children toride in the front passenger seat.

o The shoulder belt should be positionedmidway over the shoulder nearest thedoor for the most effective protection.Never wear the seat belt under the armnearest the door. Wearing the belt underthe arm nearest the door could causeserious or fatal injuries in an accident.

o Avoid wearing twisted seat belts. Atwisted belt can't do its job as well. In acollision, it could even cut into you. Besure the belt webbing is straight and nottwisted.

o Be careful not to damage the belt web-bing or hardware. If the belt webbing orhardware is damaged, replace it.

!Check to make sure that the belt is properlylocked and that the belt is not twisted.

NOTE:Seat belt reminder light comes and stays onuntil the seat belt is fastened when theignition key is turned "ON" or "START".And, the warning chime will also sound forabout 6 seconds.

B190A01Y-AAT

SEAT BELTS-Front Passenger and RearSeat 3-Point System with CombinationLocking Retractor:To Fasten Your Belt

Combination retractor type seat belts are in-stalled in the rear seat positions to help accom-modate the installation of child restraint sys-tems. Hyundai strongly recommends that chil-dren always be seated in the rear seat. NEVERplace any infant restraint system in the frontseat of the vehicle.This type of seat belt combines the features ofboth an emergency locking retractor seat beltand an automatic locking retractor seat belt. Tofasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractorand insert the metal tab into the buckle. Therewill be an audible "click" when the tab locks intothe buckle. When not securing a child restraint,

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM21

Page 34: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

22

!

B200A01A-AAT

Adjusting Your Seat Belt

WARNING:You should place the lap belt portion as lowas possible and snugly across your hips,not on your waist. If the lap belt is locatedtoo high on your waist, it may increase thechance of injury in the event of a collision.Both arms should not be under or over thebelt. Rather, one should be over and theother under, as shown in the illustration.Never wear the seatbelt under the arm near-est the door.

B200A01L

The seat belt is released by pressing the re-lease button in the locking buckle. When it isreleased, the belt should automatically drawback into the retractor.If this does not happen, check the belt to be sureit is not twisted, then try again.

B210A01A-AAT

To Release the Seat Belt

B210A01L

B220A03Y-AAT

SEAT BELTS - Center Rear Seat 3-PointSystem With Emergency Locking Re-tractor

1. Before fastening the rear seat center belt,confirm the metal tab (a) and buckle (b) arelatched together.

2. After confirming that (a) and (b) are latched,pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insertthe metal tab (c) into the buckle (d).

There will be an audible "click" when the tablocks in the buckle. The seat belt automaticallyadjusts to the proper length only after the lap beltis adjusted manually so that it fits snugly aroundyour hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy

B220A01L-A

(a)

(b)

(d)

(c)

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM22

Page 35: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

23

!

!

!

B220C01Y-AAT

To Release the Seat Belt

When you want to release the seat belt, pressthe button in the locking buckle.

WARNING:The rear seat center belt latching mecha-nism is different from those for the out-board rear seat shoulder belts. When fas-tening the outboard rear seat shoulder beltsor the rear seat center belt, make sure theyare inserted into the correct buckles toobtain maximum protection from the seatbelt system and assure proper operation.

B220C01L-A

WARNING:o When using the rear seat center belt, you

must lock all metal tabs and buckles. Ifany metal tab or buckle is not locked, itwill increase the chance of injury in theevent of collision.

B220A02Y

motion, the belt will extend and let you movearound. If there is a sudden stop or impact, thebelt will lock into position. It will also lock if youtry to lean forward too quickly.

o Never unlock the metal tab (a) and thebuckle (b) with the following excep-tions.(1) In case of folding rear seatbacks down.(2) If transporting an object on the rear

seat may cause damage to the rearseat center belt.

o Lock the metal tab (a) and the buckle (b)immediately after folding rear seatbacksup.

o To disconnect the metal tab (a) from thebuckle (b) , insert a narrow-ended toolinto the groove located on the buckle(b).

WARNING:

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM23

Page 36: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

24 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

B230A03Y-AAT

Children riding in the car should sit in the rearseat and must always be properly restrained tominimize the risk of injury in an accident, suddenstop or sudden maneuver. According to acci-dent statistics provided by the National High-way Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),children are safer when properly restrained inthe rear seats than in the front seat. Largerchildren not in a child restraint should use oneof the seat belts provided.All 50 states have child restraint laws. Youshould be aware of the specific requirements inyour state. Child and/or infant safety seats mustbe properly placed and installed in the rear seat.You must use a commercially available childrestraint system that meets the requirements ofthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards(FMVSS).Children could be injured or killed in a crash iftheir restraints are not properly secured. Forsmall children and babies, a child seat or infantseat must be used. Before buying a particularchild restraint system, make sure it fits your carseat and seat belts, and fits your child. Followall the instructions provided by the manufac-turer when installing the child restraint system.

WARNING:o A child restraint system must be placed

in the rear seat. Never install a child orinfant seat on the front passenger's seat.Should an accident occur and cause thepassenger side airbag to deploy, it couldseverely injure or kill an infant or childseated in an infant or child seat. Thus,only use a child restraint in the rear seatof your vehicle.

o A safety belt or child restraint systemcan become very hot if it is left in a closedvehicle on a sunny day, even if the out-side temperature does not feel hot. Besure to check the seat cover and bucklesbefore placing a child there.

o When the child restraint system is not inuse, store it in the trunk or fasten it witha safety belt so that it will not be thrownforward in the case of a sudden stop oran accident.

o Children who are too large to be in a childrestraint should sit in the rear seat and berestrained with the available lap/shoul-der belts. Never allow children to ride inthe front passenger seat.

WARNING:o Always make sure that the shoulder belt

portion of the lap/shoulder belt is posi-tioned midway over the shoulder andnever across the neck or behind theback. Moving the child closer toward theseat belt buckle may help provide a goodshoulder belt fit. The lap belt portion ofthe lap/shoulder belt must always bepositioned as low as possible on thechild's hips, and as snug as possible.

o If the seat belt will not properly fit thechild, Hyundai recommends the use ofan approved booster seat in the rear seatin order to raise the child's seating heightso that the seat belt will properly fit thechild.Before purchasing a booster seat, makesure that it meets applicable FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards and thatit is satisfactory for use with this vehicle.

o Never allow a child to stand up or kneelon the seat.

o Never use an infant carrier or a childsafety seat that "hooks" over a seatback;it may not provide adequate security inan accident.

! !

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM24

Page 37: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

25

WARNING:o Never allow a child to be held in a person's

arms while they are in a moving vehicle,as this could result in serious injury tothe child in the event of an accident or asudden stop. Holding a child in a movingvehicle does not provide the child withany means of protection during an acci-dent, even if the person holding the childis wearing a seat belt.

B230B01E-GAT

Using a Child Restraint SystemFor small children and babies, the use of a childseat or infant seat is required. This child seat orinfant seat should be of appropriate size for thechild and should be installed in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions. It is furtherrequired that the seat be placed in the vehicle'srear seat since this can make an importantcontribution to safety. Your vehicle is providedwith three child restraint hook holders on therear seat package tray for installing the childseat or infant seat.

B230C02Y-2

Rear seat package tray

Child Restraint Hook Holders

Tether Strap Hook

Front of Vehicle

!

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM25

Page 38: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

26

!

4. Open the tether anchor cover.

5. Clip the tether strap hook to the tether straphook holder.

B230C03Y

B230C04Y

Tether anchor cover Tether straphook holder

Tether strap hook

WARNING:o If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly,

the child restraint seat may not be re-strained properly in the event of a colli-sion.

o Do not mount more than one child re-straint to a single tether or to a childrestraint lower anchorage point. The im-proper increased load may cause theanchorage points or tether anchor tobreak, causing serious injury or death.

6. Tighten the tether strap to secure the seat.!

B230C02Y-AAT

Installing a Child Restraint seat

1. Position the child restraint seat on the rearpassenger seat cushion.

2. Route the child restraint seat tether strapover the back of the seat.For vehicles with adjustable head restraints,route the tether strap under the head re-straint and between the head restraint posts,otherwise route the tether strap over the topof the seatback.

3. Locate the correct anchor on the rear seatpackage tray for the selected seating posi-tion.

WARNING:The tether strap may not work properly ifattached somewhere other than the correcttether anchor.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM26

Page 39: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

27

!B230G03Y-AAT

Installation on Rear Seats

B230G01L

Locking mode, the belt will be locked. Afterinstallation of the child restraint system, try tomove it in all directions to be sure the childrestraint system is securely installed. If youneed to tighten the belt, pull more webbingtoward the retractor. When you unbuckle theseat belt and allow it to retract, the retractor willautomatically revert back to its normal seatedpassenger Emergency Locking usage condi-tion.

NOTE:o Before installing the child restraint sys-

tem in any seating position, read theinstructions supplied by the child re-straint system manufacturer.

o If the seat belt does not operate as de-scribed, have the system checked imme-diately by your authorized Hyundaidealer.

To install a child restraint system in the rearseats, extend the shoulder/lap belt entirely fromits retractor until a "click" is felt. This will engagethe seat belt retractor automatic locking feature,which allows the seat belt to retract but notextend. Install the child restraint system, bucklethe seat belt and allow the seat belt to take upany slack. Make sure that the lap portion of thebelt is tight around the child restraint system andthe shoulder portion of the belt is positioned sothat it can not interfere with the child's head orneck. Also, double check to be sure that theretractor has engaged the Automatic Lockingfeature by trying to extend webbing out of theretractor. If the retractor is in the Automatic

WARNING:o If the retractor is not in the Automatic

Locking mode, the child restraint sys-tem can move when your vehicle turns orstops abruptly.

o Do not install any child restraint systemin the front passenger seat. Should anaccident occur and cause the passengerside airbag to deploy, it could severelyinjure or kill an infant or child seated inan infant or child seat. Therefore, onlyuse a child restraint system in the rearseat of your vehicle.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM27

Page 40: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

28

The ISOFIX anchors are located between theseatback and the seat cushion of the rear seatleft and right outboard seating positions.Follow the child seat manufacturer's instruc-tions to properly install safety seats with ISOFIXor ISOFIX-compatible attachments.

Once you have installed the ISOFIX child re-straint seat, assure that the seat is properlyattached to the ISOFIX and tether anchors.Also, test the safety seat before you place thechild in it. Tilt the seat from side to side. Also tryto tug the seat forward. Check to see if theanchors hold the seat in place.

B230D02L-A

ISOFIXAnchor

ISOFIX Anchorlndicator Position

B230D03E-AAT

Securing the child Restraint seat withthe "ISOFIX" system WARNING:

o Do not install a child safety seat at thecenter of the rear seat using the vehicle'sISOFIX anchors. The ISOFIX anchors areonly provided for the left and right out-board rear seating positions. Do notmisuse the ISOFIX anchors by attempt-ing to attach a child sefety seat in themiddle of the rear seat position to theISOFIX anchors. In a crash, the child seatISOFIX attachments may not be strongenough to secure the child restraint seatproperly in the center of the rear seat andmay break, causing serious injury ordeath.

o Do not mount more than one child re-straint to a single tether or to a childrestraint lower anchorage point. The im-proper increased load may cause theanchorage points or tether anchor tobreak, causing serious injury or death.

o Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatiblechild seat only to the appropriate loca-tions shown.

o Always follow the installation and useinstructions provided by the manufac-turer of the child restraint.

Some child seat manufacturers make safetyseats that are labeled as ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible child seats. These seats include tworigid or webbing mounted attachments thatconnect to two ISOFIX anchors at specificseating positions in your vehicle. This type ofchild seat eliminates the need to use seat beltsto attach the child seat for forward-facing childseats.ISOFIX anchors have been provided in yourvehicle. The ISOFIX anchors are located in theleft and right outboard rear seating positions.Their locations are shown in the illustration.There is no ISOFIX anchor provided for thecenter rear seating position.

B230D01L

!

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM28

Page 41: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

29

! WARNING:If the child restraint seat is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child being seriouslyinjured or killed in a collision greatly in-creases.

B180B02S

Driver's airbag 1

2

3

Passenger'sairbag

The seat belt pre-tensioner system consistsmainly of the following components. Their loca-tions are shown in the illustration.

1. SRS airbag warning light2. Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly3. SRS control module

HXG229

B180B02A-AAT

Pre-tensioner Seat Belt

Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with driver'sand front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts.The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to makesure that the seat belts fit tightly against theoccupant's body in certain frontal collisions.The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activatedwith the airbags.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if theoccupant tries to lean forward too quickly, theseat belt retractor will lock into position. Incertain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner willactivate and pull the seat belt into tighter contactagainst the occupant's body.

! WARNING:To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-tensioner seat belt:

1. The seat belt must be worn correctly.2. The seat belt must be adjusted to the

correct position.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM29

Page 42: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

30

!CAUTION:o Because the sensor that activates the

SRS airbag is connected with pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS airbag warn-ing light on the instrument panel willblink for approximately 6 seconds afterthe ignition key has been turned to the"ON" position, and then it should turnoff.

o If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not work-ing properly, this warning light will illu-minate even if there is no malfunction ofSRS airbag system. If the SRS airbagwarning light does not illuminate whenthe ignition key is turned to "ON" or if itremains illuminated after blinking forapproximately 6 seconds, or if it illumi-nates while the vehicle is being driven,please have an authorized Hyundai dealerinspect the pre-tensioner seat belts andSRS airbag system as soon as possible.

AIRBAG

NOTE:o Both the driver's and front passenger's

pre-tensioner seat belts will be activatedin certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activatedwith the airbags. The pre-tensioners willbe activated even if the seat belts are notbeing worn at the time of the collision.

o When the pre-tensioner seat belts areactivated, a loud noise may be heard andfine dust, which may appear to be smoke,may be visible in the passenger com-partment. These are normal operatingconditions and are not hazardous.

o Although it is harmless, the fine dustmay cause skin irritation and should notbe breathed for prolonged periods. Washyour hands and face thoroughly after anaccident in which the pre-tensioner seatbelts were activated.

! WARNING:o Pre-tensioners are designed to operate

only one time. After activation, pre-tensioner seat belts must be replaced.All seat belts, of any type, should alwaysbe replaced after they have been wornduring a collision.

o The pre-tensioner seat belt assemblymechanisms become hot during activa-tion. Do not touch the pre-tensioner seatbelt assemblies for several minutes afterthey have been activated.

o Do not attempt to inspect or replace thepre-tensioner seat belts yourself. Thismust be done by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

o Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat beltassemblies.

o Do not attempt to service or repair thepre-tensioner seat belt system in anymanner.

o Improper handling of the pre-tensionerseat belt assemblies, and failure to heedthe warnings to not strike, modify, in-spect, replace, service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies may leadto improper operation or inadvertentactivation and serious injury.

o Always wear seat belts when driving orriding in a motor vehicle.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM30

Page 43: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

31SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT(AIRBAG) SYSTEM (SRS)

!

B240A03Y-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with a SupplementalRestraint (Airbag) System. The indications ofthe system’s presence are the letters "SRSAIRBAG" embossed on the airbag pad cover inthe steering wheel and the passenger’s sidefront panel pad above the glove box.

The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags installedunder the pad covers in the center of thesteering wheel and the passenger’s side frontpanel above the glove box. The purpose of theSRS is to provide the vehicle’s driver and thefront passenger with additional protection whenused together with the seat belt, in case of afrontal impact.

B240A01L

Driver's AirbagNOTE:Be sure to read information about the SRSon the labels provided on the backside ofthe sun visor and in the glove box.

WARNING:o As its name implies, the SRS is designed

to work with, and be supplemental to,the driver’s and the passenger’s threepoint seat belt systems and is not asubstitute for them. Therefore your seatbelts must be worn at all times while thevehicle is in motion. In addition, theairbags deploy only in certain frontalimpact conditions severe enough to likelycause significant injury to the vehicleoccupants.

o The SRS is designed to deploy theairbags only when an impact is suffi-ciently severe and when the impact angleis less than 30° from the forward longi-tudinal axis of the vehicle. Additionally,the airbags will only deploy once. Thus,seat belts must be worn at all times.

o Front airbags are not intended to deployin light collisions in which protectioncan be provided by the seat belt alone.

o Front airbags are not intended to deployin side-impact, rear-impact or rollovercrashes. In addition, airbags will notdeploy in frontal crashes below the de-ployment threshold speed.

o The driver should sit back as far aspossible while still maintaining controlof the vehicle. If you are sitting too closeto the airbag, it can cause death or seri-ous injury when it inflates.

B240A02L

Rear impact

Side Impact

Rollover

WARNING:!

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM31

Page 44: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

32

!!B240B02A-AAT

SRS Components and Functions

The SRS consists of the following components:

- Driver's Airbag Module- Passenger's Airbag Module- Knee Bolster- SRS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI)- SRS Control Module (SRSCM)

The SRSCM continually monitors all elementswhile the ignition is "ON" to determine if a frontalor near-frontal impact is severe enough torequire airbag deployment.

B240B01L

WARNING:o For maximum safety protection in all

types of crashes, all occupants includ-ing the driver should always wear theirseat belts whether or not an airbag isalso provided at their seating position tominimize the risk of severe injury ordeath in the event of a crash. Do not sitor lean unnecessarily close to the airbagwhile the vehicle is in motion.

o The SRS airbag system must deploy veryrapidly to provide protection in a crash.If an occupant is out of position becauseof not wearing a seat belt, the airbag mayforcefully contact the occupant causingserious or fatal injuries.

WARNING:o No objects should be placed over or near

the airbag modules on the steering wheel,instrument panel, and the frontpassenger's panel above the glove box,because any such object could causeharm if the vehicle is in a crash severeenough to cause the airbags to deploy.

o If the airbags deploy, they must be re-placed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRSwiring, or other components of the SRSsystem. Doing so could result in injury,due to accidental firing of the airbags orby rendering the SRS inoperative.

o Do not install a child restraint system inthe front passenger seat position. Achild restraint system must never beplaced in the front seat. The infant orchild could be severely injured or killedby an airbag deployment in case of anaccident.

o Do not allow children to ride in the frontpassenger seat. If older children (teen-agers and older) must ride in the frontseat, make sure they are always properlybelted and that the seat is moved back asfar as possible.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM32

Page 45: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

33

The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) onthe instrument panel will blink for about 6 sec-onds after the ignition key is turned to the "ON"position or after the engine is started, after whichthe SRI should go out.The airbag modules are located both in thecenter of the steering wheel and in the frontpassenger's panel above the glove box. Whenthe SRSCM detects a considerable impact tothe front of the vehicle, it will automaticallydeploy the airbags.

CAUTION:Do not install or place any accessories(drink holder, cassette holder, sticker, etc)on the front passenger's panel above theglove box in a vehicle with a passenger's airbag. Such objects may become dangerousprojectiles and cause injury if thepassenger's air bag inflates.

!B240B02L

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directlyinto the pad covers will separate under pres-sure from the expansion of the airbags. Furtheropening of the covers then allows full inflation ofthe airbags.

B240B03L

A fully inflated airbag in combination with aproperly worn seat belt slows the driver's or thepassenger's forward motion, thus reducing therisk of head or chest injury.

After complete inflation, the airbag immediatelystarts deflating, enabling the driver to maintainforward visibility.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM33

Page 46: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

34

!

! WARNING:o When the SRS is activated, there may be

a loud noise and fine dust will be re-leased throughout the vehicle. Theseconditions are normal and are not haz-ardous. However, the fine dust gener-ated during airbag deployment maycause skin irritation. Wash your handsand face thoroughly with lukewarm waterand a mild soap after an accident inwhich the airbags were deployed.

B240B05L

Passenger's Airbag

WARNING:o The SRS can function only when the

ignition key is in the "ON" position. If theSRS SRI does not come on, or continu-ously remains on after flashing for about6 seconds when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, or after theengine is started, comes on while driv-ing, the SRS is not working properly. Ifthis occurs, have your vehicle immedi-ately inspected by your Hyundai dealer.

o Before you replace a fuse or disconnecta battery terminal, turn the ignition keyto the "LOCK" position or remove theignition key. Never remove or replace theair bag related fuse(s) when the ignitionkey is in the "ON" position. Failure toheed this warning will cause the SRS SRIto illuminate.

!

B240B04L

Passenger's Airbag

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid airfreshener inside the vehicle, do not place itnear the instrument cluster nor on the in-strument panel surface. If there is any leak-age from the air freshener onto these areas(Instrument cluster, instrument panel or airventilator), it may damage these parts. If theliquid from the air freshener does leak ontothese areas, wash them with water immedi-ately.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM34

Page 47: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

35

WARNING:The Passenger Presence Detection systemis not intended to prevent airbag deploy-ment while a child is in the front passenger'sseat. It is intended only as a means toreduce unnecessary collision damage re-pair expense by preventing airbag and seatbelt pretensioner deployment when theright front passenger seat is unoccupied.Deployment is still possible if only a fewpounds are placed upon the seat. There-fore, children must not be transported inthe front seat. All children must be seatedin the rear seat and properly restrained withthe vehicle's restraint system or a childrestraint system appropriate for the child'ssize and weight.

B990B03L-GAT

Side impact Airbag

Your Hyundai is equipped with a side impactairbag in each front seat. The purpose of theairbag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/orthe front passenger with additional protectionthan that offered by the seat belt alone. The sideimpact airbags are designed to deploy onlyduring certain side impact collisions, dependingon the crash severity, angle, speed and point ofimpact. The side impact airbags are not de-signed to deploy in all side impact situations.

B990B02Y

!B990A04Y-AAT

PASSENGER PRESENCE DETECTION

The passenger presence detection systemdetects the presence of a passenger in the rightfront seat. If no passenger is recognized on thefront passenger seat, the deployment of thefront passenger and/or side airbag and seat beltpre-tensioner will be prevented.This system is designed to prevent the replace-ment of airbag components that deploy need-lessly in an accident.

NOTE:Luggage or other cargo heavier than 33lbs(15 kg) should not be placed on the passen-ger front seat. This can allow the deploy-ment of the front passenger and/or side airbag in the case of an accident.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM35

Page 48: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

36

!WARNING:o For best protection from the side impact

airbag system and to avoid being injuredby the deploying side impact airbag,both front seat occupants should sit inan upright position with the seat beltproperly fastened. The driver's handsshould be placed on the steering wheelat the 9:00 and 3:00 o'clock positions.The passenger's arms and hands shouldbe placed on their laps.

o Do not use any accessory seat covers.o Use of seat covers could reduce or pre-

vent the effectiveness of the system.o Do not install any accessories on the

side or near the side impact airbag.o Do not use excessive force on the side of

the seat.o Do not place any objects over the airbag

or between the airbag and yourself.o Do not place any objects (an umbrella,

bag, etc.) between the front door and thefront seat. Such objects may becomedangerous projectiles and cause injuryif the supplemental side impact air baginflates.

!

! WARNING:o The side impact airbag is supplemental

to the driver's and the passenger's seatbelt systems and is not a substitute forthem. Therefore your seat belts must beworn at all times while the vehicle is inmotion. The airbags deploy only in cer-tain side impact conditions severeenough to cause significant injury to thevehicle occupants.

HXGS261

Side airbagsensor

o To prevent unexpected deployment ofthe side impact air bag that may result inpersonal injury, avoid impact to the sideairbag sensor when the ignition key ison.

WARNING:

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM36

Page 49: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

37

!o For cleaning the airbag pad covers, use

only a soft, dry cloth or one which hasbeen moistened with plain water. Sol-vents or cleaners could adversely affectthe airbag covers and proper deploy-ment of the system.

o No objects should be placed over or nearthe airbag modules on the steeringwheel, instrument panel, and the frontpassenger's panel above the glove box,because any such object could causeharm if the vehicle is in a crash severeenough to cause the airbags to inflate.

o If the airbags inflate, they must be re-placed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRSwiring, or other components of the SRSsystem. Doing so could result in injury,due to accidental firing of the airbags orby rendering the SRS inoperative.

o If components of the airbag system mustbe discarded, or if the vehicle must bescrapped, certain safety precautionsmust be observed. Your Hyundai dealerknows these precautions and can giveyou the necessary information. Failureto follow these precautions and proce-dures could increase the risk of personalinjury.

B240C03A-AAT

SRS Care

o The SRS is virtually maintenance free andthere are no parts you can safely service byyourself. The entire SRS system must beinspected by an authorized Hyundai dealer10 years after the date that the vehicle wasmanufactured.

o Any work on the SRS system, such asremoving, installing, repairing, or any workon the steering wheel must be performed bya qualified Hyundai technician. Improperhandling of the airbag system may result inserious personal injury.

NOTE:Your vehicle's Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem Control Module is equipped a record-ing device which may record the use of theseat belt restraint system by the driver andfront passenger in certain collisions.

WARNING:o Do not install a child restraint system in

the front passenger seat position.A child restraint system must never beplaced in the front seat. The infant orchild could be severely injured or killedby an airbag deployment in case of anaccident.

o Modification to SRS components or wir-ing, including the addition of any kind ofbadges to the pad covers or modifica-tions to the body structure, can ad-versely affect SRS performance and leadto possible injury.

! WARNING:

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM37

Page 50: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

38

! WARNING:o If you sell your vehicle, make certain that

this manual is transferred to the newowner.

o If your car was flooded and has soakedcarpeting or water on the floor, youshouldn't try to start the engine; havethe car towed to an authorized Hyundaidealer.

B240D01JM-AAT

Additional Safety Precautionso Never let passengers ride in the cargo

area (trunk) or on top of a folded-downback seat. All occupants should sit upright,fully back in their seats with their seat beltson and their feet on the floor.

o Passengers should not move out of orchange seats while the vehicle is mov-ing. A passenger who is not wearing a seatbelt during a crash or emergency stop canbe thrown against the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out of the ve-hicle.

o Each seat belt is designed to restrain oneoccupant. If more than one person uses thesame seat belt, they could be seriouslyinjured or killed in a collision.

o Do not use any accessories on seatbelts. Devices claiming to improve occu-pant comfort or reposition the seat belt canreduce the protection provided by the seatbelt and increase the chance of seriousinjury in a crash.

o Passengers should not place hard orsharp objects between themselves andthe airbags. Carrying hard or sharp objectson your lap or in your mouth can result ininjuries if an airbag inflates.

o Keep occupants away from the airbagcovers. All occupants should sit upright, fullyback in their seats with their seat belts on andtheir feet on the floor. If occupants are tooclose to the airbag covers, they could beinjured if the airbags inflate.

o Do not attach or place objects on or nearthe airbag covers. Any object attached toor placed on the front or side impact airbagcovers could interfere with the proper opera-tion of the airbags.

o Do not modify the front seats. Modifica-tion of the front seats could interfere with theoperation of the supplemental restraint sys-tem sensing components or side impactairbags.

o Do not place items under the front seats.Placing items under the front seats couldinterfere with the operation of the supple-mental restraint system sensing compo-nents and wiring harnesses.

o Never hold an infant or child on your lap.The infant or child could be seriously injuredor killed in the event of a crash. All infants andchildren should be properly restrained inappropriate child safety seats or seat beltsin the rear seat.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM38

Page 51: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

39

! WARNING:o Sitting improperly or out of position can

result in serious injury or death in acrash.

o Always sit upright, fully back in the seat,with your seat belt on, and your feet onthe floor.

Adding Equipment to or Modifying YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle.

If you modify your vehicle by changing yourvehicle's frame, bumper system, front end orside sheet metal or ride height, this may affectthe operation of your vehicle's airbag system.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:02 PM39

Page 52: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

40

1 2

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260A04L-AAT

B260A03L-18 9 101112131415 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

3 4 6 73 5

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM40

Page 53: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

41

1. Cruise Indicator Light 2. Tachometer 3. Turn Signal Indicator Light 4. Speedometer 5. High Beam Indicator Light 6. Fuel Gauge 7. Traction Control Indicator Light 8. Front Fog Indicator Light 9. Stop/Tail Light Failure Warning Light10.Parking Brake/Brake Fluid Level Warning Light11.Seat Belt Warning Light12.Charging System Warning Light

13.Door Ajar Warning Light14.Oil Pressure Warning Light15.Trunk Lid Open Warning Light16.SRS (Airbag) Warning Light17.Odometer/ Trip Odometer18.Odometer/ Trip Odometer Reset Switch19.Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)20.Coolant Temperature Gauge21.Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light22.Low Fuel Warning Light23.Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM41

Page 54: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

42 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260D01A-AAT

TURN SIGNAL INDICATORLIGHTS

The blinking green arrows on the instrumentpanel show the direction indicated by the turnsignals. If the arrow comes on but does not blink,blinks more rapidly than normal, or does notilluminate at all, a malfunction in the turn signalsystem is indicated. Your dealer should beconsulted for repairs.

B260E01L-AAT

SEAT BELT REMINDER LIGHTAND CHIME

Seat belt reminder light comes and stays on untilthe seat belt is fastened when the ignition key isturned "ON" or "START".And, the warning chime will also sound for about6 seconds.

B260F01A-AAT

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR LIGHT

The high beam indicator light comes on when-ever the headlights are switched to the highbeam or flash position.

B260G01A-AAT

LOW OIL PRESSUREWARNING LIGHT

CAUTION:If the oil pressure warning light stays onwhile the engine is running, serious enginedamage may result. The oil pressure warn-ing light comes on whenever there is insuf-ficient oil pressure. In normal operation, itshould come on when the ignition switchis turned on, then go out when the engineis started. If the oil pressure warning lightstays on while the engine is running, thereis a serious malfunction.If this happens, stop the car as soon as it issafe to do so, turn off the engine and checkthe oil level. If the oil level is low, fill theengine oil to the proper level and start theengine again. If the light stays on with theengine running, turn the engine off imme-diately. In any instance where the oil lightstays on when the engine is running, theengine should be checked by a Hyundaidealer before the car is driven again.

!

B260B01L-AAT

SRS (Airbag) SERVICEREMINDER INDICATOR(SRI)

The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) comeson and flashes for about 6 seconds after theignition key is turned to the "ON" position or afterthe engine is started, after which it will go out.

This light also comes on when the SRS is notworking properly. If the SRI does not come on,or continuously remains on after flashing forabout 6 seconds, or goes out for a second afterilluminating for about 6 seconds and then con-tinuously comes on again when you turned theignition key to the "ON" position or started theengine, or if it comes on while driving, have theSRS inspected by an authorized Hyundai Dealer.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM42

Page 55: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

43

B260H01Y-GAT

Parking Brake/Brake FluidLevel Warning Light

The brake warning light indicates that the brakefluid level in the brake master cylinder is low andhydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 orDOT 4 specifications should be added. Afteradding fluid, if no other trouble is found, the carshould be immediately and carefully driven to aHyundai dealer for inspection. If further troubleis experienced, the vehicle should not be drivenat all but taken to a dealer by a professionaltowing service or some other safe method.Your Hyundai is equipped with dual-diagonalbraking systems. This means you still havebraking on two wheels even if one of the dualsystems should fail. With only one of the dualsystems working, more than normal pedal traveland greater pedal pressure are required to stopthe car. Also, the car will not stop in as short adistance with only half of the brake systemworking. If the brakes fail while you are driving,shift to a lower gear for additional engine brakingand stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so.

WARNING:If you suspect brake trouble, have yourbrakes checked by a Hyundai dealer assoon as possible. Driving your car with aproblem in either the brake electrical sys-tem or brake hydraulic system is danger-ous, and could result in a serious injury ordeath.

Warning Light Operation

The parking brake/brake fluid level warning lightshould come on when the parking brake isapplied and the ignition switch is turned to "ON"or "START". After the engine is started, the lightshould go out when the parking brake is re-leased.If the parking brake is not applied, the warninglight should come on when the ignition switch isturned to "ON" or "START", then go out whenthe engine starts. If the light comes on at anyother time, you should slow the vehicle and bringit to a complete stop in a safe location off theroadway.

B260J02A-AAT

CHARGING SYSTEMWARNING LIGHT

The charging system warning light should comeon when the ignition is turned on, then go outwhen the engine is running. If the light stays onwhile the engine is running, there is a malfunc-tion in the electrical charging system. If the lightcomes on while you are driving, stop, turn off theengine and check under the hood. First, makecertain the generator drive belt is in place. If it is,check the tension of the belt. Do this as shownon page 6-17 by pushing down on the center ofthe belt. Have the system checked by yourHyundai dealer as soon as possible.

B260L01Y-AAT

DOOR AJAR WARNING LIGHTAND CHIME

The door ajar warning light warns you that a dooris not completely closed and the chime warnsyou that driver's side front door is not completelyclosed.

NOTE:To remind you not to lock the key inside thecar, the warning light comes on wheneverthe key is in the ignition switch position anda door is open. The warning chime only

!

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM43

Page 56: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

44

!

B260M01A-AAT

LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNINGLIGHT

The low fuel level warning light comes on whenthe fuel tank is approaching empty. When itcomes on, you should add fuel as soon aspossible. Driving with the fuel level warning lighton or with the fuel level below "E" can cause theengine to misfire and damage the catalyticconverter.

B260N01A-AAT

MALFUNCTION INDICATORLIGHT

This light illuminates when there is a malfunctionof an exhaust gas related component, and thesystem is not functioning properly so that theexhaust gas regulation values are not satisfied.This light will also illuminate when the ignition keyis turned to the "ON" position, and will go out ina few seconds. If it illuminates while driving, ordoes not illuminate when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, take your car to yournearest authorized Hyundai dealer and havethe system checked.

B260P01L-GAT

ABS SERVICEREMINDER INDICATOR

When the key is turned to the "ON" position, theAnti-Lock Brake System SRI will come on andthen go off in a few seconds. If the ABS SRIremains on, comes on while driving, or does notcome on when the key is turned to the "ON"position, this indicates that there may be aproblem with the ABS.If this occurs, have your vehicle checked byyour Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. Thenormal braking system will still be operational,but without the assistance of the anti-lock brakesystem.

WARNING:If the both ABS SRI and Parking Brake/Brake fluid level warning lights remain "ON"or come on while driving, there may be aproblem with E.B.D. (Electronic brake forcedistribution).If this occurs, avoid sudden stops and haveyour vehicle checked by your Hyundai dealeras soon as possible.

B260A01B-GAT

FRONT FOG INDICATOR LIGHT

Front fog indicator light comes on whenever thefog light switch is on.

B260K01S-AAT

TRUNK LID OPEN WARNINGLIGHT

This light remains on unless the trunk lid iscompletely closed.

sounds whenever the key is in the "LOCK"position and the driver's side front door isopen. The chime sounds and the light re-mains on until the key is removed from theignition switch.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM44

Page 57: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

45INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

B260C02L-AAT

TRACTION CONTROLINDICATOR LIGHT

The traction control indicators change opera-tions according to the ignition switch positionand whether the system is in operation or not.They will also illuminate when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" or "START" position, butshould go out after three seconds. If the TCSindicator stays on, take your car to your autho-rized Hyundai dealer and have the systemchecked. See section 2 for more informationabout the TCS system.

NOTE:When the TCS is manually deactivated, theindicator light remains illuminated until theignition switch is turned off.

B260Q01Y-GAT

CRUISE INDICATOR Light(If installed)

The cruise indicator light in the instrument clus-ter is illuminated only when the vehicle cruisingspeed has been set using the control switch onthe steering wheel.The indicator light does not illuminate when themain cruise control switch is activated.Information about the use of cruise control isbeginning on page 1-75.

B280A01A-AAT

FUEL GAUGE

The needle on the gauge indicates the approxi-mate fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel capacityis given in Section 9.

B270A01A-AAT

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING SOUND

The front disc brake pads have wear indicatorsthat should make a high-pitched squealing orscraping noise when new pads are needed. Thesound may come and go or be heard all the timewhen the vehicle is moving. It may also be heardwhen the brake pedal is pushed down firmly.Excessive rotor damage will result if the wornpads are not replaced. See your Hyundai dealerimmediately.

B270B01L-AAT

STOP/TAIL LIGHT FAILUREWARNING LIGHT

If the Stop/Tail Light Failure warning light comeson when the parking brake is applied or the taillight is turned on, check the brake lines or thetail light bulb.

B280A01L

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM45

Page 58: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

46

B330A01L-AAT

TACHOMETER

The tachometer registers the speed of yourengine in revolutions per minute (rpm).

CAUTION:The engine should not be raced to such aspeed that the needle enters the red zoneon the tachometer face. This can causesevere engine damage and may void yourwarranty.

!

B330A01L

B300A01A-AAT

SPEEDOMETER

Your Hyundai's speedometer is calibrated inmiles per hour (on the outer scale) and kilome-ters per hour (on the inner scale).

B300A01L

!

B290A02A-AAT

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

WARNING:Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. The engine coolant is underpressure and could erupt and cause severeburns. Wait until the engine is cool beforeremoving the radiator cap.

B290A01L

The needle on the engine coolant temperaturegauge should stay in the normal range. If itmoves across the dial to "H" (Hot), pull over andstop as soon as possible and turn off the engine.Then open the hood and, after the engine hascooled, check the coolant level and the waterpump drive belt. If you suspect cooling systemtrouble, have your cooling system checked byHyundai dealer as soon as possible.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM46

Page 59: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

47

B310B01L-AAT

ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER

Function of digital odometer/trip odom-eter

Pushing the reset switch built in the right side ofspeedometer when the ignition switch is turned"ON" will display the following sequence:

B310C01L-A1. Odometer

The odometer records the total driving distancein miles, and is useful for keeping a record formaintenance intervals.

NOTE:Any alteration of the odometer may voidyour warranty coverage.

2. Trip odometer

Records the distance of 2 trips in miles.TRIP A :First distance you have traveled from

your origination point to a first desti-nation.

TRIP B :Second distance from the first desti-nation to the final destination.

B360B01L-AAT

Front Fog Light Switch

To turn on the front fog lights, place the switchin the "ON" position. They will light when theheadlight switch is in the second position.

NOTE:If you turn on the headlight high beams, thefront fog lights are turned off.

B310B01L-A

HHP269-2

To shift from TRIP A to TRIP B, press the resetswitch. When pressed for 1 second, it will reset to 0.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM47

Page 60: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

48 MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHT SWITCH

B340B01A-AAT

Lane Change Signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up ordown to a point where it begins flashing.The lever will automatically return to the centerposition when released.

B340C02E-AAT

Headlight Switch

To operate the headlights, turn the barrel on theend of the multi-function switch. The first posi-tion turns on the parking lights, sidelights, taillights and instrument panel lights. The secondposition turns on the headlights.

NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON" positionto turn on the headlights.

Parking light auto cut

If you do not turn the parking lights "OFF" afterdriving, the parking lights will automatically shut"OFF" when the driver's door is opened. To turnthem "ON" again you must simply turn theignition key to the "ON" position.

HHP269-1 HHP267

B340A01A-AAT

COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL,HEADLIGHT AND HIGH-BEAMSWITCH

Turn Signal Operation

Pulling down on the lever causes the turnsignals on the left side of the car to blink. Pushingupwards on the lever causes the turn signals onthe right side of the car to blink. As the turn iscompleted, the lever will automatically return tothe center position and turn off the turn signalsat the same time. If either turn signal indicatorlight blinks more rapidly than usual, goes on butdoes not blink, or does not go on at all, there isa malfunction in the system. Check for a burned-out fuse or bulb or see your Hyundai dealer.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM48

Page 61: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

49

B340F01L-GAT

Auto Light (If Installed)

To operate the automatic light feature, turn thebarrel on the end of the multi-function switch. Ifyou set the multi-function switch to "AUTO", thetail lights and headlights will be turned automati-cally on or off according to external illumination.

3A9CA44

B340D01A-AAT

High-beam SwitchB340E01A-AAT

Headlight Flasher

To flash the headlights, pull the switch levertoward you, then release it. The headlights canbe flashed even though the headlight switch isin the "OFF" position.

HHP268

To turn on the headlight high beams, push thelever forward (away from you). The High BeamIndicator Light will come on at the same time. Forlow beams, pull the lever back toward you.

HHP269

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM49

Page 62: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

50 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSWITCH

Mist Wiper Operation

If a single wipe is desired in mist, push the MISToperation switch at the end of the windshieldwiper and washer control lever.

B350B01Y-GAT

Windshield Washer Operation

To use the windshield washer, pull the wiper/washer lever toward the steering wheel. Whenthe washer lever is operated, the wipers auto-matically make two passes across the wind-shield. The washer continues to operate untilthe lever is released.

NOTE:o Do not operate the washer more than 15

seconds at a time or when the fluidreservoir is empty.

o In icy or freezing weather, be sure thewiper blades are not frozen to the glassprior to operating the wipers.

o In areas where water freezes in winter,use windshield washer antifreeze.

B350B01LB350B02L

B350A01A-AAT

The windshield wiper switch has three posi-tions:

1. Intermittent wiper operation2. Low-speed operation3. High-speed operation

NOTE:To prevent damage to the wiper system, donot attempt to wipe away heavy accumula-tions of snow or ice. Accumulated snowand ice should be removed manually. Ifthere is only a light layer of snow or ice,operate the heater in the defrost mode tomelt the snow or ice before using the wiper.

B350A01L

1

2

3

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM50

Page 63: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

51

!

B350B01B-GAT

Auto Wiper Operation(If Installed)

B350B03L

When the windshield wiper switch is placed inthe "AUTO" position, the rain sensor located onthe upper end of windshield glass senses theamount of rainfall and controls for the appropri-ate length of the intervals between wipes appro-priately.

NOTE:If there is heavy accumulation of snow orice on the windshield glass, there will be a10 minute waiting period prior to the opera-tion of the windshield wipers.

Rain Sensor

WARNING:When the ignition switch is on and thewindshield wiper switch is placed in the"AUTO" mode, please use caution in thefollowing cases to avoid any hand injury:As the wiper system may automaticallyactivate, the fingers or hand might be caughtin the wiper.

o Do not touch the upper end of the wind-shield glass facing the rain sensor.

o Do not wipe the upper end of the wind-shield glass with a cloth.

o Do not put pressure on the windshieldglass.

B350C01L-AAT

Adjustable Intermittent Wiper Operation

To use the intermittent wiper feature, place thewiper switch in the "INT" position. With theswitch in this position, the interval betweenwipes can be varied from approximately 1 to 18seconds by turning the interval adjuster barrel.This is also varied automatically depending onyour road speed.

B350C01L

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM51

Page 64: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

52 REAR WINDOW DEFROSTERSWITCH

HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM

The rear window defroster and heated outsiderearview mirrors are turned on by pushing in theswitch. At the same time, the rear windowdefroster indicator light on the switch is turnedon. To turn the defroster off, push the switch asecond time. The rear window defroster auto-matically turns itself off after about 20 minutes.To restart the defroster cycle, push in the switchagain after it has turned itself off.

B380A01HP-GAT

(If Installed)

HXG122

Manual A/Con

Full automatic A/Con

CAUTION:Do not clean the inner side of the rearwindow glass with an abrasive type of glasscleaner or use a scraper to remove theforeign deposits from the inner surface ofthe glass as this may cause damage to thedefroster elements.

!

NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON" positionfor the rear window defroster to operate.

B370A01A-AAT

The hazard warning system should be usedwhenever you find it necessary to stop the carin a hazardous location. When you must makesuch an emergency stop, always pull off theroad as far as possible.The hazard warning lights are turned on bypushing in the hazard switch. This causes allturn signal lights to blink. The hazard warninglights will operate even though the key is not inthe ignition.To turn the hazard warning lights off, push theswitch a second time.

HXGS217

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM52

Page 65: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

53TRIP COMPUTERDIGITAL CLOCK

B400A01A-AAT

HXG516J

Without Trip Computer

With Trip Computer

There are three control buttons for the digitalclock. Their functions are:

HOUR - Push "H" to advance the hour indi-cated.

MIN - Push "M" to advance the minute indi-cated.

RESET - Push "R" to reset minutes to ":00" tofacilitate resetting the clock to thecorrect time. When this is done:

Pressing "R" between 10 : 30 and 11 : 29changes the readout to 11 : 00.Pressing "R" between 11 : 30 and 12 : 29changes the readout to 12 : 00.

o DISTANCE TO EMPTY - This mode indi-cates the estimated distance to empty fromthe current fuel in the fuel tank. When theremaining distance is below 30 miles(50km), a blinking "--.-" symbol will be displayed.

NOTE:o If the vehicle is not on level ground or the

battery power has been interrupted, the"DISTANCE TO EMPTY" function maynot operate correctly.

o The trip computer may not register addi-tional fuel if less than 2 gallons of fuel areadded to the vehicle.

B400B05L-A

Distance to empty symbol

Distance to empty

B400B03L-AAT

(If Installed)

Trip computer is a microcomputer-controlleddriver information gauge that displays informa-tion related to driving, such as estimated dis-tance to empty, average speed and driving timeon the LCD.

MODE

Pushing "MODE" to select distance to empty,average speed and driving time for the drivinginformation. Each push of the button changesthe display as follows;

DISTANCE TO EMPTY

AVERAGE SPEED

DRIVING TIME

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM53

Page 66: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

54 INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHTCONTROL

B410A01A-AAT

(RHEOSTAT)

o DRIVING TIME - This mode indicates thetotal time from the starting of the vehicle to theignition key "OFF" after resetting. When the"RESET" switch is pushed, it will initialize to0:00.

RESET

Pushing "RESET" more than 1 second to initial-ize the displayed information such as averagespeed and driving time.

B400B06L-1

Driving time symbolDriving time

B410A01Lo AVERAGE SPEED - This mode indicates

the average speed from the starting of thevehicle to the ignition key "OFF". When theignition key is "OFF", it will initialize to 0 mph(0 km/h).

B400B02L-A

Average speed symbol

Average speed

The instrument panel lights can be made brighteror dimmer by turning the instrument panel lightcontrol knob.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM54

Page 67: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

55POWER OUTLETCIGARETTE LIGHTER

B420A01A-AAT

For the cigarette lighter to work, the key mustbe in the "ACC" position or the "ON" position.To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the wayinto its socket. When the element has heated,the lighter will pop out to the "ready" position.Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in. Thiscan damage the heating element and create afire hazard.If it is necessary to replace the cigarette lighter,use only a genuine Hyundai replacement or itsapproved equivalent.

B420A02L

B500D07O-GAT

(If Installed)These supply 12V electric power to operateelectric accessories or equipment only whenthe key is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

HXG058-1

B500D01L

Without rear ventilator With rear ventilator

CAUTION:Do not use the power outlet to connectelectric accessories or equipment otherthan those designed to operate on 12 volts.

!

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM55

Page 68: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

56 DRINK HOLDERASHTRAY

HXG523J

The drink holder is located on the main consolefor holding cups or cans. The drink holder canbe opened by pushing at its top edge.

B450A01L-GAT

CAUTION:Place the drink holder in its closed positionwhen not in use.

!

B430A01Y-AAT

FRONT ASHTRAY

The front ashtray may be opened by pushingand releasing the ashtray/cigarette lighter doorat its top edge.To remove the ashtray to clean it, the metal ashreceptacle should be removed from the ashtraydoor. Do not attempt to remove the entireashtray door assembly or damage will result.Instead, push the metal ash receptacle downand forward in the ashtray door, and it can thenbe lifted out. To reinstall it, place it in the properposition and press it down and forward toengage the ash receptacle rear lip in the ashtraydoor. The ashtray light will only illuminate whenthe exterior body lights are switched on.

B440A02L-AAT

REAR ASHTRAY

The rear ashtray may be opened by pulling theashtray lid out. To remove the ashtray to euptyor clean it, lift the metal ash receptacle upwardand pull it out.

HXG055 HXG522J

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM56

Page 69: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

57SUNROOFREAR DRINK HOLDER

!

!B450B01L-GAT

The rear drink holder is located on front of the rearseat arm rest for holding cups. The drink holder canbe used by pushing it in first and then releasing it.

HXGS223

WARNING:Do not place anything except drinks in thedrink holder. Such objects can be thrownout, possibly injuring persons in the ve-hicle during sudden braking or in the eventof an accident.

CAUTION:Place the drink holder in its closed positionwhen not in use.

WARNING:Do not place anything except drinks in thedrink holder. Such objects can be thrownout, possibly injuring persons in the ve-hicle during sudden braking or in the eventof an accident.

!

!

B460A01Y-AAT

SUNROOF (If Installed)Sun Shade

Your HYUNDAI is equipped with a sliding sun-shade which you can manually adjust to let inlight with the sunroof closed, or to block sunlight.

WARNING:Never adjust the sunshade while driving.

B460A01L

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM57

Page 70: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

58

CAUTION:o Do not open the sunroof in severely cold

temperature or when it is covered withice or snow.

o Periodically remove any dirt that mayhave accumulated on the guide rails.

!B460C01Y-AAT

Tilting the Sunroof

The sunroof can be tilted and closed with theignition key in the "ON" position. Release thebutton when the sunroof reaches the desiredposition.

NOTE:After washing the car or after there is rain,be sure to wipe off any water that is on thesunroof before operating it.

HXGS233

!

B460B01Y-AAT

Opening the Sunroof System

The sunroof can be electrically opened or closedwith the ignition key in the "ON" position. To openor to close, press and hold the button locatedin the front of the roof panel. Release the buttonwhen the sunroof reaches the desired position.

WARNING:o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's hands,

arms or body are between the slidingglass and the sunroof sash, as this couldresult in injury.

o Do not place your head or arms out of thesunroof opening at any time.

HXGS232

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM58

Page 71: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

59

B460D03Y-AAT

Manual Operation of Sunroof

If the sunroof does not electrically operate:

1. Remove the rectangular plastic interior lightlens in the front of the roof panel.

HXGS234

HXGS235

2. Remove the front overhead light and switchpanel.

3. Insert the hexagonal head wrench providedwith the vehicle into the socket. This wrenchcan be found in the vehicle's trunk or glovebox.

4. Turn the wrench clockwise to open or coun-terclockwise to close the sunroof.

HXGS236

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM59

Page 72: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

60 INTERIOR LIGHTFRONT MAP LIGHT

B490A01L-AAT

Front overhead console light

The interior courtesy light has three buttons.The three buttons are:

o DOORIn the "DOOR" position, the interior courtesylight comes on when any door is opened regard-less of the ignition key position. The light goesout gradually 6 seconds after the door is closed.

o ONIn the "ON" position, the light stays on at alltimes.

o OFFIn the "OFF" position, the light stays off at alltimes even though a door is open.

With Sunroof

HXG602J-1

B480A01L-GAT

(With sunroof)

The two map light switches are located on bothsides of the interior light. Push in the map lightswitch to turn the light on or off.

HXG602J

B480B01L

B480B01Y-AAT

FRONT MAP LIGHT(Without Sunroof)

Push in the map light switch to turn the light onor off. This light produces a spot beam forconvenient use as a map light at night or as apersonal light for the driver and the passenger.

Without spectacle case

With spectacle case

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM60

Page 73: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

61SPECTACLE CASE

B490C01L-AAT

Rear room light

The interior courtesy light has three buttons.The three buttons are:

o DOORIn the "DOOR" position, the interior courtesylight comes on when any door is opened regard-less of the ignition key position. The light goesout gradually 6 seconds after the door is closed.

o ONIn the "ON" position, the light stays on at alltimes.

o OFFIn the "OFF" position, the light stays off at alltimes even though a door is open.

B490B01L-GAT

Personal Light (If Installed)

The personal lights are located on both of therear pillars. Push the personal light switch to turnthe lights on or off.

HSM045 B490B01L

!

B491A02F-AAT

(If Installed)

The spectacle case is located on the frontoverhead console.Push the end of the cover to open or close thespectacle case.

WARNING:Do not open the spectacle case while thevehicle is moving.The rear view mirror of the vehicle can beblocked by an open spectacle case.

HXG303

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM61

Page 74: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

62 MIRROR

!

CAUTION:o Do not operate the switch continuously

for an unnecessary length of time.o Scraping ice from the mirror face could

cause permanent damage. To removeany ice, use a sponge, soft cloth orapproved de-icer.

!

WARNING:Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the passengerside rear view mirror. It is a convex mirrorwith a curved surface. Any objects seen inthis mirror are closer than they appear.

HXGS252

GLOVE BOX

!

B510B01L-AAT

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRRORElectric Type

The outside rearview mirrors can be adjustedin any direction to give the maximum rearviewvision.The remote control outside rearview mirrorswitch controls the adjustments for both rightand left outside mirrors.

To adjust the position of eithermirror:

1. Move the selecting switch to the right or leftto activate the adjustable mechanism for thecorresponding door mirror.

2. Now, adjust mirror angle by depressing theappropriate directional switch as illustrated.

B500A01S-AAT

WARNING:To avoid the possibility of injury in case ofan accident or a sudden stop, the glove boxdoor should be kept closed when the car isin motion.

o To open the glove box, pull on the glove boxrelease lever.

o The glove box door can be locked (andunlocked) with the key.

HXG513

B510B01L

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM62

Page 75: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

63

!

B510C03A-AAT

FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REAR VIEWMIRRORS

To fold the outside rear view mirrors, push themtoward the rear.The outside rear view mirrors can be foldedrearward for parking in narrow areas.To unfold the outside rear view mirrors, pushthem toward the front.

WARNING:Do not adjust or fold the outside rear viewmirrors while the vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in loss of control, and an acci-dent which could cause serious injury ordeath.

B510D01HP-GAT

OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR HEATER(If installed)

The outside rearview mirror heater is actuatedin connection with the rear window defroster. Toheat the outside rearview mirror glass, push inthe switch for the rear window defroster. Therearview mirror glass will be heated for defrost-ing or defogging and will give you improved rearvision in inclement weather conditions. Push theswitch again to turn the heater off. The outsiderearview mirror heater automatically turns itselfoff after 20 minutes.

B510C01LHXG122

Manual A/Con

Full automatic A/Con

B520A01A-AAT

DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REAR VIEW MIR-ROR

Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/night insiderear view mirror. The "night" position is selectedby flipping the tab at the bottom of the mirrortoward you. In the "night" position, the glare ofheadlights of cars behind you is reduced.

HXG514J

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM63

Page 76: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

64 HOMELINK MIRROR

Automatic-Dimming Function

To assist you during nighttime driving, yourmirror will automatically dim upon detectingglare from the vehicles behind you.

Press the button to turn the automatic-dimming function off. The mirror indicator lightwill turn off.

Press the button to turn the automatic-dimming function on. The mirror indicator lightwill illuminate.

NOTE:The mirror defaults to the "on" positioneach time the vehicle is started.

B520C01L

Automatic-dimming mirrorfunction buttons

B520B01O-GAT

DAY/NIGHT REAR VIEW MIRROR(Electric type) (If Installed)

The electric type day/night inside rearview mir-ror automatically controls the glare of headlightsof the car behind you. Adjust the rearview mirrorto the desired position.

HXG514J-1

Indicator Light

B520C01L-GAT

(If Installed)

Your new vehicle may be equipped with anautomatic night vision mirror. During nighttimedriving, this feature will automatically detect andreduce dangerous rearview mirror glare.

Your new mirror also comes with an integratedHomeLink Universal Transceiver, which allowsyou to program up to 3 buttons on the mirror toactivate your garage door(s), estate gate, homelighting, etc. The mirror actually learns thecodes from your various existing transmitters.

B520C01L

Glare Detection

Homelink buttons

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM64

Page 77: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

65

!

!

HOMELINK PROGRAMMING

CAUTION:o Make sure people and/or objects are out

of the way of any garage doors or gatesyou may be operating during the pro-gramming procedures.

o Keep original transmitters for potentialfuture programming needs, or in caseyou sell the vehicle.

o In the event you do sell your vehicle, it'srecommended you erase your pro-grammed HomeLink mirror buttons.

WARNING:Do not use HomeLink with any garage dooropener that lacks the safety stop and re-verse feature as required by federal safetystandards (includes garage doors manu-factured before April 1, 1982), as thesedoors can increase the risk of serious injuryor death. Call 1-800-355-3515 or visitwww.homelink.com for more information.

Programming

Ensure the ignition switch is turned to the "ACC"position to program and/or operate HomeLinksystem. It is also recommended that a newbattery be placed in the handheld transmitter ofthe device being programmed to HomeLink forquicker programming and accurate transmis-sion of the radio-frequency.Follow these steps to program your HomeLinkmirror:

1. When programming the buttons for the firsttime, press and hold the two outsideHomeLink buttons ( , ), releasing whenthe indicator light begins to flash (approxi-mately 20 seconds). This procedure erasesthe factory-set default codes. Do not per-form this step when programming additionaltransmitters.

B520C02L

Flashing

NOTE:If programming a garage door opener orgate, it is advised to unplug the deviceduring the "cycling" process to preventpossible motor burnout.

Flashing

2. Hold the transmitter of the device you wantto program 1 to 3 inches away from thebottom of the mirror. Simultaneously pressthe handheld transmitter button and theHomeLink button you wish to program. Theindicator light will flash slowly at first, thenrapidly, indicating successful programming.

B520C03L

Transmitter

1 ~

3 inc

hes

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM65

Page 78: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

66

Operating HomeLink

Simply press the appropriate HomeLink buttonto activate the trained product (garage door,security system, entry door lock, estate gate,lighting, etc.). The original handheld transmit-ters may also be used at any time.

Erasing Programmed Buttons

To erase the three HomeLink buttons, pressand hold the two outside buttons until the indica-tor light begins to flash (after 20 seconds).Release both buttons.

Individual buttons cannot be erased, but can bereprogrammed.

Additional Programming for Rolling CodeDevices

For any rolling-code-equipped device; followthe steps additional below after completing the"Programming" section. A second person maymake the following steps easier.

1. Locate the "learn" or "smart" button on thedevice's motor head unit. The exact locationand color of the button varies by productbrand, but is usually referenced in the device'sowner's manual. Contact HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or www.homelink.com forhelp.

2. Press and release the "learn" or "smart"button on the device's motor head unit.

NOTE:You now have 30 seconds to initiate step 3.

B520C02L

Flashing

3. If the garage door opener or other device youwish to program is rolling-code equipped,proceed to the "Rolling Code Programming"section.

4. Repeat step 2 to program the remainingHomeLink buttons.

3. Return to the vehicle and firmly press andrelease the programmed HomeLink button.Press and release the same HomeLink but-ton a second time to complete the program-ming process. (Some devices may requireyou to press and release a third time tocomplete the programming.)

4. Now HomeLink mirror and rolling-code-equipped device should be synchronized.The remaining HomeLink buttons may nowbe programmed if this has not been donepreviously.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM66

Page 79: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

67PARKING BRAKE

B530B01L-GAT

(Foot type)

o To engage the foot type parking brake,depress the parking brake pedal beneaththe left side of the lower instrument panel.

o To release the parking brake, pull up theparking brake release lever at the left side ofthe instrument panel.

Gate Operator Programming & Cana-dian Programming

During programming, your handheld transmit-ter may automatically stop transmitting.Continue to press and hold the HomeLink buttonwhile you press and repress ("cycle") yourhandheld transmitter every two seconds untilthe frequency signal has been learned. Theindicator light will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly upon successful programming.

Accessories

For more information on HomeLink andHomeLink-compatible products, or to purchaseHomeLink accessories, call 1-800-355-3515or visit www.homelink.com.

HXGS325

Reprogramming a Single HomeLinkButton

To program a device to HomeLink using aHomeLink button previously trained, follow thesesteps:1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink but-

ton. Do not release until step 4 has beencompleted.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly(after 20 seconds), hold the handheld trans-mitter 1 to 3 inches away from the bottom ofthe mirror.

3. Press and hold the transmitter button (or, ifnecessary, press and "cycle," as describedin the '"Gate Operator & Canadian Program-ming" portion of this text).

4. The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowlyat first, then rapidly, indicating successfulprogramming. Release both buttons.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM67

Page 80: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

68 TRUNK LID

!

!

B540B02L-AAT

Trunk Lid Knob Lock (If Installed)

WARNING:The trunk lid should always be kept com-pletely closed while the vehicle is in motion.If it is left open or ajar, exhaust gases mayenter the car and serious illness or deathmay result. See additional warnings con-cerning exhaust gases on page 2-2.

If the trunk lid lock knob (located near the latch)is in the "LOCK" position when the trunk lid isclosed, it will not be possible to open the trunklid by using the remote release. In this instance,use the master key to unlock and open the trunklid.To allow the trunk lid to be opened with theremote release, push the trunk lid lock knobdown, to the opposite direction of the "LOCK"position.

B540A01S-AAT

Remote Trunk Lid Release

To open the trunk lid without using the key, pullup the lid release lever located on the driver'sdoor panel.To close, lower the trunk lid, then press downon it until it locks. To be sure the trunk lid issecurely fastened, always check by trying topull it up again.

HXGS231

B540B03L

WARNING:Doors and trunk should be kept locked andkeys be kept out of the reach of children.Parents also should teach their childrenabout the dangers of playing in trunks.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM68

Page 81: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

69

!B540B02E-AAT

Trunk Lid Emergency Latch Release

Your vehicle is equipped with a glow-in-the darkemergency trunk release lever located insidethe trunk. It will glow after the trunk is closed.When pulled, this lever will release the trunklatch mechanism and open the trunk.

Pull to open the trunk

B540D02L

WARNING:o If a person is locked in the trunk, pull the

emergency trunk release lever on thedriver's side of the inside panel of thetrunk to open the trunk lid.

o HYUNDAI recommends that cars be keptlocked and keys be kept out of the reachof children, and that parents teach theirchildren about the dangers of playing intrunks.

o Parents should teach children about theemergency trunk release lever in theirvehicle and how to open the trunk lid ifthey are accidentally locked in the trunk.

B540C02Y-AAT

To unlock using the key

To open the trunk lid, insert the key and turn itclockwise to unlock. The trunk compartmentlight illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.

B540C03L

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM69

Page 82: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

70

!

HXGS255

WARNING:o The fuel cap must be tightened at least

3 clicks, otherwise light will illum-inate.

o Gasoline vapors are dangerous. Beforerefueling, always stop the engine andnever allow sparks or open flames nearthe filler area. If you need to replace thefiller cap, use a genuine Hyundai re-placement part.

REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LIDRELEASE

B550A02Y-AAT

HIGH-MOUNTED REAR STOP LIGHT

In addition to the lower-mounted rear stoplightson either side of the car, the high mounted rearstoplight in the center of the rear window alsolights when the brakes are applied.

B550A03L

HXGS207

B560A03Y-AAT

The fuel-filler lid may be opened from inside thevehicle by pulling up on the fuel-filler lid openerlocated on the front floor area on the left side ofthe car.

NOTE:If the fuel-filler lid will not open because icehas formed around it, tap lightly or push onthe lid to break the ice and release the lid. Donot pry on the lid. If necessary, spray aroundthe lid with an approved deicer fluid (do notuse radiator anti-freeze) or move the ve-hicle to a warm place and allow the ice tomelt.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:03 PM70

Page 83: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

71

WARNING:o If you open the fuel filler cap during high

ambient temperatures, a slight "pres-sure sound" may be heard. This is nor-mal and not a cause for concern.Whenever you open the fuel filler cap,turn it slowly.

o Make sure the fuel filler cap is replacedand securely seated after fueling. Failureto replace or fully seat the fuel filler capwill result in fuel vapors escaping intothe atmosphere and the MIL indicatorilluminating.

o Do not "TOP-OFF" after the first nozzleshut off when refueling.

o Automotive fuels are flammable/explo-sive materials. When refueling, pleasenote the following guidelines carefully.

o Before touching the fuel nozzle or fuelfiller cap, have one's hands in contactwith metal parts away from the filler neckto discharge static electricity.

o Do not get back in the vehicle whilerefueling. Do not operate anything thatcan produce static electricity. Static elec-tricity discharge can ignite fuel vaporsresulting in explosion.

!B560B01L-GAT

Manual Fuel Filler Lid Release

If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened using theremote opener, a manual opener handle islocated inside the trunk on the left side. Open thefuel filler lid by pulling on this handle as shownin the illustration.

HXG115

! WARNING:o When using a portable fuel container be

sure to place the container on the groundwhile refueling. Static electricity dis-charge from the container can ignite fuelvapors causing a fire. While starting re-fueling contact should be maintaineduntil the filling is complete.

o Do not use cellular phones around a gasstation. The electric current or electronicinterference from cellular phones canignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

o When refueling always shut the engineoff. Sparks by electrical equipment ofthe engine can ignite fuel vapors caus-ing a fire. After refueling, check to makesure the fuel filler cap is securely closed,and then start the engine.

o Do not smoke or try to light cigarettesaround a gas station. Automotive fuelsare flammable.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM71

Page 84: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

72

!

2. Press the secondary latch lever up and liftthe hood.

3. Raise the hood by hand.

When closing the hood, slowly close the hoodand make sure it locks into place.

The accessory box may be opened by pushingat its top edge.It is used for storing small items.

B500A01L-GAT

HXG111

WARNING:o Always double check to be sure that the

hood is firmly latched before drivingaway. If it is not latched, the hood couldfly open while the vehicle is being driven,causing a total loss of visibility, whichmight result in an accident.

o Do not move the vehicle with the hoodin the raised position, as vision is ob-structed and the hood could fall or bedamaged.

ACCESSORY BOXHOOD RELEASE

B570A01L-GAT

1. Pull the release knob to unlatch the hood.

HXG047

HXGS208

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM72

Page 85: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

73SUN VISORFLOOR MAT ANCHOR

B580A01L-GAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with sun visors to givethe driver and front passenger either frontal orsideward shade. To reduce glare or to shut outdirect rays of the sun, turn the sun visor down.A vanity mirror is provided on the back of the sunvisor for the driver and the front passenger.

NOTE:The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)label containing useful information can befound on the back of each sun visor.

B450B01E-GAT

(If Installed)

The CD Auto Changer is located in the left sideof the trunk. This system can store up to 8 CDs.You may select music without changing disks.First, open the CD Auto Changer door, removethe CD "magazine", and insert up to 8 CDs.Then, push the magazine into the CD AutoChanger. The CD may be operated with thepassenger compartment audio system con-trols.

B450B01L

B580A01L

!

B571A03Y-AAT

When using a floor mat on the front floor carpet,make sure it attaches to the floor mat anchor inyour vehicle. This keeps the floor mat fromsliding forward.

WARNING:o Make sure the floor mat is properly placed

on the floor carpet. If the floor mat slipsand interferes with the movement of thepedals during driving, it may cause anaccident.

o Don't put a additional floor mat on the topof the fixed mat, otherwise the additionalmat may slide forward and interfere withthe movement of the pedals.

HXGS263

CD Auto Changer

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM73

Page 86: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

74 DOOR COURTESY LIGHT HORN

B610A01Y-AAT

B620A01L

B620A01L-AAT

A red light comes on when the door is opened.The purpose of this light is to assist when youget in or out, and also to warn passing vehicles.

HXGS218

Working zone

Press the pad on the steering wheel to sound thehorn.

! WARNING:Do not place the sun visor in such a mannerthat it obscures visibility of the roadway,traffic or other objects.

B580B03Y-AAT

Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Installed)

The mirror light turns on at all times when the lidis opened.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM74

Page 87: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

75CRUISE CONTROLSTEERING WHEEL TILT LEVERREAR SEAT ARM REST

!

B660A01S-AAT

The cruise control system provides automaticspeed control for your comfort when driving onfreeways, tollroads, or other noncongestedhighways. This system is designed to functionabove approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

B600A01HP-GAT

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever toward you and hold it to unlock.2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the

desired position.3. After adjustment, release the lever.

WARNING:Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheelwhile driving as this may result in loss ofcontrol of the vehicle and serious injury ordeath.

HXG609J B660A01L

B611A02L-AAT

The rear seat arm rest is located in the centerof the rear seat back. A storage box is includedfor convenience.

HXGS601J

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM75

Page 88: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

76

B660E01L-GAT

To Reset at a Faster Speed

1. Push the control switch "RESUME (ACCEL)"2. Accelerate to desired speed. While the con-

trol switch is held, the vehicle will graduallygain speed.

B660C03L-AAT

To Cancel the Cruise SpeedB660D01L-AAT

To Resume the Preset Speed

Do one of the following:

o Push the control switch "CANCEL".o Depress the brake pedal.o Release the main switch.

NOTE:If the vehicle speed decreases more than 9mph (15 km/h) below the set speed ordecreases below 25 mph (40 km/h), thecruise control system will automaticallycancel the set speed.

The vehicle will automatically resume the speedset prior to cancellation when you push thecontrol switch "RESUME (ACCEL)" (above 25mph).

B660C01L B660D01L

B660B01L-AAT

To Set the Cruise Speed

1. Push in the cruise control main switch. Thisturns the system on.

2. Accelerate to desired cruising speed above25 mph (40 km/h).

3. Push the control switch "SET" (COAST)position. The "CRUISE" indicator light in theinstrument cluster will illuminate after youhave set the vehicle speed at the desiredspeed.

4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedaland the desired speed will automatically bemaintained.

5. To increase speed, depress the acceleratorpedal enough for the vehicle to exceed thepreset speed. When you remove your footfrom the accelerator pedal, the vehicle willreturn to the speed you have set.

B660B01L

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM76

Page 89: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

77

WARNING:o Keep the main switch off when not using

the cruise control.o Do not use the cruise control when it

may not be safe to keep the car at aconstant speed, for instance, driving inheavy or varying traffic, or on slippery(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or windingroads or over 6% up-hill or down-hillroads.

o Pay particular attention to the drivingconditions whenever using the cruisecontrol system.

o During normal cruise control operation,when the "SET" button is activated orreactivated after applying the brakes,the cruise control will energize afterapproximately 3 seconds. This delay isnormal.

!B660F01L-AAT

To Reset at a Slower Speed

1. Push the control button "SET (COAST)".The vehicle will decelerate.

2. When the desired speed is obtained, releasethe control button. While the control switch ispushed, the vehicle speed will graduallydecrease.

B660B01L

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM77

Page 90: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

78 VENTILATIONHEATING AND COOLING CONTROL

B710A01L-GAT

1. Side Ventilator2. Side Defrost Nozzle3. Center Ventilator4. Windshield Defrost Ventilator

B710B01A-AAT

Center Ventilator

The center ventilators are located in the middleof the dashboard.To change the direction of the airflow, turn thecontrol knob on the middle of the ventilator asdesired.

B710C01Y-AAT

Side Ventilator

The side vent knobs control the amount ofoutside air entering the vehicle through the sidevents. These vents can also be closed,so no airenters through the side vents. To change thedirection of the air flow, turn the control knobsas desired.

B710A01L-AAT

To operate the ventilation system:o Set the air intake control at the fresh air ( )

position.o To direct all intake air to the dashboard

vents, set the airflow control to the face ( )position.

o Adjust the fan speed control to the desiredspeed.

B710A01L-1

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM78

Page 91: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

79

1

HXG121

B680A02L-GAT

ROTARY AND PUSH BUTTON TYPE(If Installed)

There are four controls for the heating andcooling system. They are:

1. Fan speed control2. Air intake control3. Air flow control4. Temperature control

HXG119

2

3 4

B670C01Y-AAT

Air Intake Control

This is used to select fresh outside air orrecirculating inside air.

FreshRecirculation

With the " " mode selected, air enters thevehicle from outside and is heated or cooledaccording to the other functions selected.With the " " mode selected, air from withinthe passenger compartment is drawn throughthe heating system and heated or cooled ac-cording to the other functions selected.

B670C02L

B670B03Y-AAT

Fan Speed Control (Blower Control)

This is used to turn the blower fan on and off andto select the fan speed.The blower fan speed, and therefore the volumeof air delivered from the system, may be con-trolled manually by setting the blower controlbetween the 1 and 4 position.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM79

Page 92: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

80

NOTE:o It should be noted that prolonged opera-

tion of the heating system in " " modewill give rise to misting of the windshieldand side windows and the air within thepassenger compartment will becomestale. In addition prolonged use of the airconditioning with the " " mode selectedmay result in the air within the passengercompartment becoming excessively dry.

o When the ignition switch is turned "ON",the air intake control will change to " "mode (regardless of switch position).This is normal operation.

HEF030

B670D01L-AAT

Air Flow Control

This is used to direct the flow of air. Air can bedirected to the floor, dashboard outlets, orwindshield. Five symbols are used to representFace, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and De-frost air position.

Face-Level

Selecting the "Face" mode will cause air to bedischarged through the face level vents.

B670D02L-1

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM80

Page 93: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

81

B670D04L-1

Bi-Level

Air is discharged through the face vents and thefloor vents. This makes it possible to havecooler air from the dashboard vents and warmerair from the floor outlets at the same time.

Floor-Level

Air is discharged through the floor vents, wind-shield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle,side ventilator.

Floor-Defrost Level

Air is discharged through the windshield defrostnozzle, the floor vents, side defroster nozzle,side ventilator.If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected, the A/Cwill turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode willbe activated.

B670D03L-1 B670D05L-1

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM81

Page 94: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

82 HEATING CONTROLS

B670E02A-AAT

Temperature Control

This control is used to adjust the degree ofheating or cooling desired.

HXG124

Cool Warm

B690A01E-AAT

For normal heating operation, set the air intakecontrol to the fresh air ( ) position and the airflow control to the floor ( ) position.

For faster heating, the air intake control shouldbe set in the recirculate ( ) position.

If the windows fog up, set the air flow control tothe defrost ( ) position. (The A/C will be onautomatically and "Fresh" mode will be acti-vated.)

For maximum heat, move the temperature con-trol to "Warm".

HXG119B670D06L-1

Defrost-Level

Air is discharged through the windshield defrostnozzle, side defroster nozzle, side ventilator.If the "Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C will turnon automatically and "Fresh" mode will be ac-tivated.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM82

Page 95: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

83BI-LEVEL HEATING

B700A01A-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-level heatingcontrols. This makes it possible to have coolerair from the dashboard vents and warmer airfrom the floor outlets at the same time. To usethis feature:

o Set the air intake control to the fresh air ( )position.

o Set the air flow control at the bi-level ( )position.

o Set the temperature control between "Cool"and "Warm"

B700A01L

o To keep dust or unpleasant fumes fromentering the car through the ventilation sys-tem, temporarily set the air intake control tothe position. Be sure to return the controlto the position when the irritation haspassed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. Thiswill help keep the driver alert and comfort-able.

o Air for the heating/cooling system is drawnin through the grilles just ahead of the wind-shield. Care should be taken that these arenot blocked by leaves, snow, ice or otherobstructions.

B730A01L-AAT

OPERATION TIPS

B730A01L

o To prevent interior fog on the windshield, setthe air intake control to the fresh air ( )position, fan speed to the desired position,turn on the air conditioning system, andadjust temperature control to desired tem-perature.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM83

Page 96: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

84 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.For greater cooling, turn the fan control toone of the higher speeds or temporarilyselect the recirculate ( ) position on theair intake control.

B740C01A-AAT

De-Humidified HeatingFor dehumidified heating:

o Turn on the fan control switch.o Turn on the air conditioning switch. The air

conditioning indicator light should come on atthe same time.

o Set the air intake control to the fresh air ( )position.

o Set the air flow control to the face ( ) position.o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.o For more rapid action, set the fan at one of

the higher speeds.o Adjust the temperature control to provide the

desired amount of warmth.

B740B01L-GAT

Air Conditioning Operation (If Installed)Cooling

To use the air conditioning to cool the interior:

o Set the side vent control to "OFF", to shut offthe outside air entry.

o Turn on the fan control switch.o Turn on the air conditioning switch by push-

ing in on the switch. The air conditioningindicator light should come on at the sametime.

o Set the air intake control to the fresh air ( )position.

o Set the temperature control to "Cool". ("Cool"provides maximum cooling. The tempera-ture may be moderated by moving the con-trol toward "Warm".)

HXG119

B740A01S-AAT

Air Conditioning Switch

The air conditioning is turned on or off bypushing the A/C button on the heating/air con-ditioning control panel.

B670C03L

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM84

Page 97: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

85

Manual A/Con Full automatic A/Con

NOTE:When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrost level ( ), it may causefog to form on the exterior windshield. If this occurs set the air flow control to the face level position( ) and fan speed control to the low position.

To remove interior fog on the windshield;o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position.

(The A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" modewill be activated.)

o Set the temperature control to the desired position.o Set the fan speed control between "1" and "4" position.

To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield;o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position.

(The A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" modewill be activated.)

o Set the temperature control to warm.o Set the fan speed control to position "3" or "4".

B720A01E-AAT

DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING

B720A02L B720A03L

Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog the windshield:

Manual A/Con Full automatic A/Con

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM85

Page 98: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

86 AUTOMATIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM

B970A01Y-AAT

(If Installed)

Your Hyundai is equipped with an automaticheating and cooling control system controlledby simply setting the desired temperature.

B970B01L-GAT

Heating and Cooling Controls

1. Blower Fan Control Switch2. AUTO (Automatic Control) Switch3. OFF Switch4. Display Window5. Temperature Control Button6. Defroster Switch7. Air Conditioning Switch8. Air Flow Control Switch9. Air Intake Control Switch/Air Quality System

Switch (If installed)10.Ambient Temperature Switch11.Rear Window Defroster Switch12.Rear Ventilator Switch (If installed)

HXG118-2

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM86

Page 99: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

87

B970C02L-AAT

Automatic Operation

2. Push the "TEMP" button to set the desiredtemperature.The temperature will increase to the maxi-mum 90°F(32°C) by pushing on the button.Each push of the button will cause the tem-perature to increase by 1°F (0.5°C).The temperature will decrease to the mini-mum 62°F(17°C) by pushing on the button.Each push of the button will cause the tem-perature to decrease by 1°F (0.5°C).

The FATC (Full Automatic Temperature Con-trol) system automatically controls heating andcooling as follows:

1. Push the "AUTO" switch. The indicator lightwill illuminate confirming that the Face, Floorand/or Bi-Level modes as well as the blowerspeed and, air conditioner will be controlledautomatically.

NOTE:If the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, the temperature mode will resetto centigrade degrees.This is a normal condition and you canchange the temperature mode from centi-grade to farenheit as follows;Press the TEMP button down 3 seconds ormore with the AMB button held down. Thedisplay shows that the unit of temperatureis adjusted to centigrade or fahrenheit.(°C →→→→→ °F or °F →→→→→ °C)

NOTE:Never place anything over the sensor whichis located on the instrument panel to en-sure better control of the heating and cool-ing system.

Photo sensorB970C01L

B970C02L

B970C03L

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM87

Page 100: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

88

B995A01Y-GAT

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SWITCH

B980A01Y-AAT

MANUAL OPERATION

The heating and cooling system can be con-trolled manually as well by pushing buttonsother than the "AUTO" button. In this state, thesystem sequentially works according to theorder of buttons selected.The function of the buttons which are not se-lected will be controlled automatically.Press the "AUTO" button in order to convert toautomatic control of the system.

B980B02Y-AAT

Fan Speed Control Switch

Pressing the AMB button displays the ambienttemperature on the display.

The fan speed can be set to the desired speedby pressing the appropriate fan speed controlbutton. To increase fan speed press the arrow.To decrease fan speed, press the arrow. Thehigher the fan speed is, the more air is delivered.Pressing the "OFF" button turns off the fan.

HXG506J

This is used to select fresh outside air orrecirculate inside air automatically.

: OFF: ON

Fresh mode :

Air enters the vehicle from the outside and isheated or cooled according to the functionselected.

B980C02E-GAT

Air Intake Control Switch(With A.Q.S) (If Installed)

HXG507J B980B01L

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM88

Page 101: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

89

Recirculation mode :

Air from within the passenger compartment willbe drawn through the heating system and heatedor cooled according to the function selected.

Exhaust gas cutoff mode :

Air enters the vehicle from the outside.But if exhaust gas enters the vehicle from theoutside, the exhaust gas cutoff mode ( ) isautomatically converted to the ( ) mode, toprevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.

NOTE:o It should be noted that prolonged opera-

tion of the heating system in recircula-tion mode ( ) will give rise to mistingof the windshield and side windows andthe air within the passenger compart-ment will become stale. In addition, pro-longed use of the air conditioning withthe recirculation mode ( ) selectedmay result in the air within the passengercompartment becoming excessively dry.

o When the ignition switch is turned "ON",the air intake control will change to ( )mode (regardless of switch position).This is normal operation. The air intakecontrol operates in "AUTO" mode whenturning the ignition to the ON position ifthe "AUTO" mode was used before shut-ting off the engine.

B980D01Y-AAT

Heating and Cooling System Off

Press the "OFF" button to stop the operation ofthe heating and cooling system.

CAUTION:If the windows fog up with the Recircula-tion or A.Q.S mode selected, set the airintake control to the Fresh air position orA.Q.S control to "OFF".

!

B980E01L-GAT

Air Flow Control

HXG505J

This is used to direct the flow of air. Air can bedirected to the floor, dashboard outlets, orwindshield. Four symbols are used to representFace, Bi-Level, Floor and Floor-Defrost airposition.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM89

Page 102: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

90

Bi-Level

When selecting the "Bi-Level" mode, the indica-tor light will come on and the air will be dis-charged through the face vents and the floorvents. This makes it possible to have cooler airfrom the dashboard vents and warmer air fromthe floor outlets at the same time.

Floor-Level

When selecting the "Floor-Level" mode, theindicator light will come on and the air will bedischarged through the floor vents, windshielddefrost nozzle, side defroster nozzle, side ven-tilator.

B670D04L-1B670D03L-1

Face-Level

When selecting the "Face" mode, the indicatorlight will come on, causing air to be dischargedthrough the face level vents.

B670D02L

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM90

Page 103: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

91AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (FOREVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

B760A01L-AAT

B760A01Y

Inside ofa vehicle

Evaporator core

FilterBlower

Outside air

Inside air

The air conditioner filter is located in front of theevaporator unit behind the glove box.It operates to decrease pollutants from enteringthe car and to filter the air.To replace the air conditioner filter, refer to thepage 6-15.

B980C02L-AAT

Defrost Switch

When the "Defrost" button is pressed, the " "mode will be automatically selected and the airwill be discharged through the windshield de-frost nozzle, side defroster nozzle and sideventilator. To assist in defrosting the air condi-tioning will operate if ambient temperature ishigher than 38.3°F (3.5°C) and automaticallyturns off if the ambient temperature drops below38.3°F (3.5°C).

B980C01L

B670D05L-1

Floor-Defrost Level

When selecting the "Floor-Defrost" mode, theindicator light will come on and the air will bedischarged through the windshield defrost vents,the floor vents, side defroster nozzle side ven-tilator .

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM91

Page 104: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

92

B740D01Y-AAT

Operation Tips

o If the interior of the car is hot when you firstget in, open the windows for a few minutesto expel the hot air.

o When you are using the air conditioningsystem, keep all windows closed to keep hotair out.

o When moving slowly, as in heavy traffic, shiftto a lower gear. This increases engine speed,which in turn increases the speed of the airconditioning compressor.

o On steep grades, turn the air conditioning offto avoid the possibility of the engine over-heating.

o During winter months or in periods when theair conditioning is not used regularly, run theair conditioning once every month for a fewminutes. This will help circulate the lubri-cants and keep your system in peak oper-ating condition.

! CAUTION:o Replace the filter every 12,000 miles

(20,000 km) or once a year.If the car is being driven in severe condi-tions such as dusty, rough roads, morefrequent air conditioner filter inspec-tions and changes are required.

o When the air flow rate is decreased, itmust be checked at an authorizedHyundai dealer.

o If your vehicle is not equipped with thisfilter, it can be installed by your dealer.Check with your dealer for details.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM92

Page 105: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

93STEREO SOUND SYSTEM

Ionosphere

B750A02L

AM reception

Mountains

Buildings

Unobstructedarea

FM radio station

B750A03L

FM reception

B750A01L

Obstructed areaIron bridges

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequen-cies and do not bend to follow the earth'ssurface. Because of this, FM broadcasts gen-erally begin to fade at short distances from thestation. Also, FM signals are easily affected bybuildings, mountains, or other obstructions.These can result in certain listening conditionswhich might lead you to believe a problem existswith your radio. The following conditions arenormal and do not indicate radio trouble:

AM broadcasts can be received at greaterdistances than FM broadcasts. This is becauseAM radio waves are transmitted at low frequen-cies. These long, low frequency radio wavescan follow the curvature of the earth rather thantravelling straight out into the atmosphere. Inaddition, they curve around obstructions so thatthey can provide better signal coverage.

B750A02A-AAT

How Car Audio Works

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast fromtransmitter towers located around your city.They are intercepted by the radio antenna onyour car. This signal is then received by theradio and sent to your car speakers.When a strong radio signal has reached yourvehicle, the precise engineering of your audiosystem ensures the best possible quality repro-duction. However, in some cases the signalcoming to your vehicle may not be strong andclear. This can be due to factors such as thedistance from the radio station, closeness ofother strong radio stations or the presence ofbuildings, bridges or other large obstructions inthe area.

Ionosphere

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM93

Page 106: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

94

!B750A04L B750A05L

o Station Swapping - As an FM signal weak-ens, another more powerful signal near thesame frequency may begin to play. This isbecause your radio is designed to lock ontothe clearest signal. If this occurs, selectanother station with a stronger signal.

o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals beingreceived from several directions can causedistortion or fluttering. This can be caused bya direct and reflected signal from the samestation, or by signals from two stations withclose frequencies. If this occurs, selectanother station until the condition has passed.

o Fading - As your car moves away from theradio station, the signal will weaken andsound will begin to fade. When this occurs,we suggest that you select another strongerstation.

o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or largeobstructions between the transmitter andyour radio can disturb the signal causingstatic or fluttering noises to occur. Reducingthe treble level may lessen this effect until thedisturbance clears.

B750B01L-AAT

Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio

When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,noise may be produced from the audio equip-ment. This does not mean that something iswrong with the audio equipment. In such a case,use the cellular phone at a place as far aspossible from the audio equipment.

WARNING:Don't use a cellular phone when you aredriving. Stop at a safe place to use a cellularphone.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM94

Page 107: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

95

B940G01L-GAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H940A) (If Installed)

B940G01L-11. POWER ON/OFF/VOLUME CONTROL Knob

2. BASS/BALANCE CONTROL Knob

3. TREBLE/FAD Knob

4. TUNE/SEEK Select Button

5. PRESET Buttons6. BAND Selector

7. EQ Button

8. BEST STATION MEMORY orSCAN Button (If installed)

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM95

Page 108: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

96

B940H02L-AAT

1. POWER ON-OFF/VOLUMECONTROL KNOB

The radio unit may be operated when the ignitionkey is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press thebutton to switch the power on. The displayshows the radio frequency in the radio mode,the tape direction indicator in the tape mode, orCD track either in the CD mode or CD AUTOCHANGER mode. To switch the power off,press the button again.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase thevolume and turn the knob counterclockwise toreduce the volume.

2. BASS/BALANCE ControlBASS Control Knob

Press the control knob to pop the knob out. Toincrease the bass, rotate the knob clockwise,while to decrease the bass, rotate the knobcounterclockwise.

BALANCE Control

Pull the Bass control knob out further. Rotate theknob clockwise to emphasize right speakersound (left speaker sound will be attenuated).When the control knob is turned counter clock-wise, left speaker sound will be emphasized(right speaker sound will be attenuated).

3. TREBLE/FAD KnobTREBLE Control Knob

Press the control knob to pop the knob out andturn to the left or right for the desired treble tone.

FAD (Fader Control) Knob

Pull the Treble control knob out further.Turn thecontrol knob clockwise to emphasize rearspeaker sound (front speaker sound will beattenuated). When the control knob is turnedcounterclockwise, front speaker sound will beemphasized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-ated).

4. TUNE (Manual) Select Button

Press the (+) side or (-) side to increase or todecrease the frequency. With the button helddown for 0.5 sec. or more, the frequency selec-tion will increase or decrease rapidly.

SEEK Operation (Automatic ChannelSelection)

Press the TUNE select button 1 sec. or more.When the (+) side is pressed, the unit will auto-matically tune to the next higher frequency andwhen the (-) side is pressed, it will automaticallytune to the next lower frequency.

5. PRESET STATION SelectButtons

Six (6) stations for AM, FM and FM2 respec-tively can be preset in the electronic memorycircuit.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM96

Page 109: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

97

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may be pro-grammed into the memory of the radio. Then, bysimply pressing the band select button and/orone of the six station select buttons, you mayrecall any of these stations instantly. To pro-gram the stations, follow these steps:o Press band selector to set the band for AM,

FM and FM2.o Select the desired station to be stored by

seek, scan or manual tuning.o Determine the preset station select button

you wish to use to access that station.o Press the station select button for more than

two seconds. A select button indicator willshow in the display indicating which selectbutton you have depressed. The frequencydisplay will flash after it has been stored intothe memory. You should then release thebutton, and proceed to program the nextdesired station. A total of 18 stations can beprogrammed by selecting one AM and twoFM station per button.

o When completed, any preset station may berecalled by selecting AM, FM or FM2 bandand the appropriate station button.

6. BAND Selector

Pressing the button changes the AM, FM1 andFM2 bands. The mode selected is shown on thedisplay.

7. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for thedesired tone quality. Each press of the buttonchanges the display as follows;

CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT↑

8. Best Station Memory Button(BSM) (If installed)

When the BSM button is pressed for two sec-onds or longer, the six channels from the high-est field intensity are selected next and storedin memory. The stations selected are stored inthe sequence frequency from the first presetkey.

!

9. SCAN Button (If installed)

When the scan button is pressed, the frequencywill increase and the receivable stations will betuned in one after another, receiving each sta-tion for 5 seconds. To stop scanning, press thescan button again.

CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The audio system mecha-nism may be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe audio system mechanism could bedamaged.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM97

Page 110: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

98

B940I01L-GAT

CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (H940A) (If Installed)

1. FF/REW Button

3. TAPE PROGRAMButton

4. EJECT Button

5. EQ Button

6. DOLBY ButtonB940G01L-1

2. AUTO MUSICSelect Button

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM98

Page 111: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

99

B940J01L-GAT

1. FF/REW Button

o Fast forward tape winding starts when theFF button is pressed during PLAY or REWmode.

o PLAY starts when the FF button is pressedagain during FF mode.

o Tape rewinding starts when REW button ispressed during PLAY or FF mode.

o PLAY starts when REW button pressedagain during REW mode.

2. AUTO MUSIC SELECT Button

Press the button to find the starting point of eachsong in a prerecorded music tape. The quietspace between songs (must have at least a 4sec. gap) can be identified by the AUTO MUSICSELECT button.

o Pressing the will play the beginning ofthe next music segment.

o Pressing the will start replay at thebeginning of the music just listened to.

o To stop FF or REW action, press the buttonagain.

3. TAPE PROGRAM Button

This allows you to play the reverse side of thetape by merely pressing the program button. Anarrow will appear in the display to show tapedirection.

4. EJECT button

o When the EJECT button is pressed with acassette loaded, the cassette will eject.

o When the EJECT button is pressed duringFF/REW mode, the cassette will eject.

5. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for thedesired tone quality. Each press of the buttonchanges the display as follows;

CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT↑

6. DOLBY Button

If you get background noise during tape PLAY,you can reduce this considerably by merelypressing the DOLBY button. If you want tocancel the DOLBY feature, press the buttonagain.

! CAUTION:o Do not insert anything like coins into the

player slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe playback mechanism could be dam-aged.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM99

Page 112: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

100

B940K01L-GAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (H940A) (If Installed)

2. FF/REW Button

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

5. REPEATB940G01L-1

1. Playing CD

4. SCAN Button

6. EQ Button

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM100

Page 113: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

101

B940L02L-GAT

1. Playing CD

o Insert the CD with the label facing upward.o Insert the CD to start CD playback, during

radio operation or cassette tape playing.o When a disc is in the CD deck, if you press

the CD button the CD player will begin playingeven if the radio or cassette player is beingused.

o The CD player can be used when the ignitionswitch is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position.

2. FF/REW

While the disc is playing, if you hold down the FFbutton continuously, the selected track is ad-vanced. Holding down the REW button continu-ously moves the selected track back.

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc currently beingplayed can be selected using the tracknumber.

o Press once to skip forward to the beginn-ing of the next track.

o Press once to skip back to the beginningof the track.

4. SCAN (If installed)

o Press the SCAN button to playback the first10 seconds of each track.

o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.when you have reached the desired track.

5. REPEAT

o To repeat the track you are currently listen-ing to, press the RPT button. To cancel ,press again.

o If you do not release RPT operation after allthe tracks are played back, the unit will playback again from the first track.

6. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for thedesired tone quality. Each press of the buttonchanges the display as follows;

NOTE:o To assure proper operation of the unit,

keep the vehicle interior temperaturewithin a normal range by using thevehicle's air conditioning or heating sys-tem.

o When replacing the fuse, replace it witha fuse having the correct capacity.

o The preset station frequencies are allerased when the car battery is discon-nected. Therefore, all data will have to beset again if this should occur.

o Do not add any oil to the rotating parts.Keep magnets, screwdrivers and othermetallic objects away from the tapemechanism and head.

o This equipment is designed to be usedonly in a 12 volt DC battery system withnegative ground.

o This unit is made of precision parts. Donot attempt to disassemble or adjustany parts.

o When driving your vehicle, be sure tokeep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

o Do not expose this equipment (includ-ing the speakers and tape) to water orexcessive moisture.

CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT↑

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM101

Page 114: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

102

! CAUTION:o Do not isert warped or poor quality discs

into the CD player as damage to the unitmay occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into theplayer slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe playback mechanism could be dam-aged.

o Driving on the off-roads or other vibra-tions may skip your compact disc.Do not use the audio system on off-roads as the discs could be scratchedand damaged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.These can cause poor disc scratching tooccur or trouble in the compact discplayer.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable as the player could not beoperated in recording way of the CDmaker. When using the compact discplayer, genuine CDs are recommended.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:04 PM102

Page 115: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

103

B940M01L-GAT

CD AUTO CHANGER (H940A) (If Installed)

1. CDCHG Button

2. FF/REW Button

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

4. DISC Select Button 5. SCAN Button (If installed)

B940G01L-1

6. REPEAT

7. EQ Button

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM103

Page 116: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

104

7. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for thedesired tone quality. Each press of the buttonchanges the display as follows;

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc currently beingplayed can be selected using the tracknumber.

o Press once to skip forward to the beginn-ing of the next track.

o Press once to skip back to the beginningof the track.

4. DISC Select Button

To select the CD you want, push "DISC +" or"DISC -" to change the disc number

5. SCAN (If installed)

o Press the SCAN button to playback the first10 seconds of each track.

o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.for the desired track.

6. REPEAT

o To repeat the track you are listening to,press the RPT button. To cancel , pressagain.

o If you do not release RPT operation after allthe tracks are played back, the unit will playback again from the first track.

CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT↑

B940N02L-GAT

The CD auto changer connected with audiosystem is located in the left side of trunk.

o To use the CD auto changer

1. Open the sliding lid of the CD auto changer.2. To eject the compact disc magazine, press

the EJECT button located inside the CD autochanger.

3. Insert the discs into the magazine.4. Push the magazine into the CD auto changer

and close the sliding lid.

o The CD auto changer can be used when theignition switch is in either "ON" or "ACC"position.

1. CDCHG Button

When the CD changer have discs inserted in themagazine, if you press the CDCHG button, theCD changer can be used even if the radio orcassette player is being used. The Hyundai CDchanger can hold up to eight discs. The discnumber will be lit, and the track number, andelapsed time will be displayed.

2. FF/REW

While the disc is playing, if you hold down the FFbutton continuously, the selected track is ad-vanced. Holding down the REW button continu-ously moves the selected track back.

NOTE:o When replacing the fuse, replace it with

a fuse having the correct capacity.o This equipment is designed to be used

only in a 12 volt DC battery system withnegative ground.

o This unit is made of precision parts. Donot attempt to disassemble or adjustany parts.

o When driving your vehicle, be sure tokeep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM104

Page 117: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

105

! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD changer as damage tothe unit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into thechanger slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe playback mechanism could be dam-aged.

o Driving on the off-roads or other vibra-tions may skip your compact disc.Do not use the audio system on off-roads as the discs could be scratchedand damaged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.These can cause poor disc scratching tooccur or trouble in the compact discplayer.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable as the player could not beoperated in recording way of the CDmaker. When using the compact discplayer, genuine CDs are recommended.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM105

Page 118: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

106

B940O01L-AAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H940C) (If Installed)

H940O01L1. POWER ON/OFF/VOLUME CONTROL Knob

2. BASS/BALANCE CONTROL Knob

3. TREBLE/FAD Knob

4. TUNE/SEEK Select Button

5. PRESET Buttons

6. BAND Selector

7. EQ Button

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM106

Page 119: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

107

B940P02L-AAT

1. POWER ON-OFF/VOLUMECONTROL KNOB

The radio unit may be operated when the ignitionkey is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press thebutton to switch the power on. The displayshows the radio frequency in the radio mode,CD track either in the CD mode or CD AUTOCHANGER mode. To switch the power off,press the button again.

VOLUME Control

Rotate the knob clockwise to increase thevolume and turn the knob counterclockwise toreduce the volume.

2. BASS/BALANCE ControlBASS Control Knob

Press to pop the knob out. To increase the bass,rotate the knob clockwise, while to decrease thebass, rotate the knob counterclockwise.

BALANCE Control

Further pull the popped-up knob. Rotate theknob clockwise to emphasize right speakersound (left speaker sound will be attenuated).When the control knob is turned counterclock-wise, left speaker sound will be emphasized(right speaker sound will be attenuated).

3. TREBLE/FAD KnobTREBLE Control Knob

Press to pop the knob out and turn to the left orright for the desired treble tone.

FAD (Fader Control) Knob

Further pull the popped-up knob. Turn thecontrol knob clockwise to emphasize rearspeaker sound (front speaker sound will beattenuated). When the control knob is turnedcounterclockwise, front speaker sound will beemphasized (rear speaker sound will be attenu-ated).

4. TUNE / SEEK Select ButtonTUNE (Manual) Select Button

Press the (+) side or (-) side to increase or todecrease the frequency. With the button helddown for 0.5 sec. or more, the frequency selec-tion will increase or decrease rapidly.

SEEK Operation(Automatic Channel Selection)

Press the TUNE select button 1 sec. or more.When the (+) side is pressed, the unit willautomatically tune to the next higher frequencyand when the (-) side is pressed, it will automati-cally tune to the next lower frequency.

5. PRESET STATION Select Buttons

Six (6) stations for AM, FM and FM2 respec-tively can be preset in the electronic memorycircuit.

HOW TO PRESET STATIONS

Six AM and twelve FM stations may be pro-grammed into the memory of the radio. Then, bysimply pressing the band select button and/orone of the six station select buttons, you mayrecall any of these stations instantly. To pro-gram the stations, follow these steps:

o Press band selector to set the band for AM,FM and FM2.

o Select the desired station to be stored byseek, scan or manual tuning.

o Determine the preset station select buttonyou wish to use to access that station.

o Press the station select button for more thantwo seconds. A select button indicator willshow in the display indicating which selectbutton you have depressed. The frequencydisplay will flash after it has been stored intothe memory. You should then release thebutton, and proceed to program the nextdesired station. A total of 18 stations can beprogrammed by selecting one AM and twoFM station per button.

o When completed, any preset station may berecalled by selecting AM, FM or FM2 bandand the appropriate station button.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM107

Page 120: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

108

6. BAND Selector

Pressing the button changes the AM, FM1 andFM2 bands. The mode selected is shown on thedisplay.

7. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for thedesired tone quality. Each press of the buttonchanges the display as follows;

CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT↑

! CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The audio system mecha-nism may be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe audio system mechanism could bedamaged.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM108

Page 121: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

109

H940O01L

B940Q01L-AAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (H940C) (If Installed)

1. Playing CD

2. FF/REW Button

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

4. REPEAT

5. EQ Button

6. EJECT Button

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM109

Page 122: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

110

B940R02L-AAT

1. Playing CD

o Insert the CD with the label facing upward.o Insert the CD to start CD playback, during

radio operation or cassette tape playing.o When a disc is in the CD deck, if you press

the CD button, the CD player will beginplaying even if the radio or cassette playeris being used.

o The CD player can be used when the ignitionswitch is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position.

2. FF/REW

While the disc is playing, if you hold down the FFbutton continuously, the selected track is ad-vanced. Holding down the REW button continu-ously moves the selected track back.

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc currently beingplayed can be selected using the tracknumber.

o Press once to skip forward to the beginn-ing of the next track.

o Press once to skip back to the beginningof the track.

4. REPEAT

o To repeat the track you are currently listen-ing to, press the RPT button. To cancel,press again.

o If you do not release RPT operation after allthe tracks are played back, the unit will playback again from the first track.

5. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for thedesired tone quality. Each press of the buttonchanges the display as follows;

NOTE:o To assure proper operation of the unit,

keep the vehicle interior temperaturewithin a normal range by using thevehicle's air conditioning or heating sys-tem.

o When replacing the fuse, replace it witha fuse having the correct capacity.

o The preset station frequencies are allerased when the car battery is discon-nected. Therefore, all data will have to beset again if this should occur.

o Do not add any oil to the rotating parts.Keep magnets, screwdrivers and othermetallic objects away from the tapemechanism and head.

o This equipment is designed to be usedonly in a 12 volt DC battery system withnegative ground.

o This unit is made of precision parts. Donot attempt to disassemble or adjustany parts.

o When driving your vehicle, be sure tokeep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

o Do not expose this equipment (includ-ing the speakers and tape) to water orexcessive moisture.

CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT↑

6. EJECT Button

When the EJECT button is pressed with a CDloaded, CD will eject.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM110

Page 123: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

111

! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damage to theunit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into theplayer slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe playback mechanism could be dam-aged.

o Driving on the off-roads or other vibra-tions may skip your compact disc.Do not use the audio system on off-roads as the discs could be scratchedand damaged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.These can cause poor disc scratching tooccur or trouble in the compact discplayer.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable as the player could not beoperated in recording way of the CDmaker. When using the compact discplayer, genuine CDs are recommended.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM111

Page 124: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

112

B940S01L-AAT

CD AUTO CHANGER (H940C) (If Installed)

1. CDCHG Button

2. FF/REW

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

4. DISC Select Button

5. REPEAT

6. EQ Button

H940O01L

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM112

Page 125: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

113

B940T02L-AAT

The CD auto changer is located in the left sideof the trunk.

o To use the CD auto changer

1. Open the sliding lid of the CD auto changer.2. To eject the compact disc magazine, press

the EJECT button located in the CD autochanger.

3. Insert the discs into the magazine.4. Push the magazine into the CD auto changer

and close the sliding lid.

o The CD auto changer can be used when theignition switch is in either "ON" or "ACC"position.

1. CDCHG Button

When the CD changer magazine contains discs,press the CDCHG button and the CD changercan be used even if the radio is being used. TheHyundai CD changer can hold up to eight discs.The disc number will be lit, and the track number,and elapsed time will be displayed.

2. FF/REW

While the disc is playing, if you hold down the FFbutton continuously, the selected track is ad-vanced. Holding down the REW button continu-ously moves the selected track back.

3. TRACK UP/DOWN

o The desired track on the disc currently beingplayed can be selected using the tracknumber.

o Press once to skip forward to the beginn-ing of the next track.

o Press once to skip back to the beginningof the track.

4. DISC Select Button

To select the CD you want, push "DISC +" or"DISC-" to change the disc number.

5. REPEAT

o To repeat the track you are listening to,press the RPT button. To cancel, pressagain.

o If you do not release RPT operation after allthe tracks are played back, the unit will playback again from the first track.

6. EQ Button

Press the EQ button to select the CLASSIC,JAZZ, ROCK and DEFEAT MODE for thedesired tone quality. Each press of the buttonchanges the display as follows;

NOTE:o When replacing the fuse, replace it with

a fuse having the correct capacity.o This equipment is designed to be used

only in a 12 volt DC battery system withnegative ground.

o This unit is made of precision parts. Donot attempt to disassemble or adjustany parts.

o When driving your vehicle, be sure tokeep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

CLASSIC → JAZZ → ROCK → DEFEAT↑

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM113

Page 126: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

114

! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD changer as damage tothe unit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into thechanger slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact on the audio system, orthe playback mechanism could be dam-aged.

o Driving on the off-roads or other vibra-tions may skip your compact disc.Do not use the audio system on off-roads as the discs could be scratchedand damaged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.These can cause poor disc scratching tooccur or trouble in the compact discplayer.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CD-Rewritable as the player could not beoperated in recording way of the CDmaker. When using the compact discplayer, genuine CDs are recommended.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM114

Page 127: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

115AUDIO FAULT CODE

INDICATION

Er2

Er3

Er6

Er8

HHH

no CD

B890A01Y-AAT

If you see any error indication in the display while using the system in the CD or Tape mode, find the cause in the chart below.If you cannot clear the error indication, take the car to your Hyundai dealer.

SOLUTION

After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.

If disc is not ejected, consult your hyundai dealer.

Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.

Press the eject button and pull out the disc.

Then insert a normal cd disc.

Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the cd player.

Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.

After resetting the audio system, push the eject button.

If tape does not eject, consult your Hyundai dealer.

Fault code will reset automatically when the temperature returns to normal.

Insert disc in magazine or insert cd magazine in the auto changer.

CAUSE

CD DECK MECHANICAL ERROR

(EJECT ERROR, LOADING ERROR)

FOCUS ERROR

DATA READ ERROR

DISC ERROR

TAPE DECK ERROR

TAPE EJECT ERROR

TEMPERATURE IS TOO HIGH

NO DISC IN MAGAZINE

NO CD MAGAZINE IN THE AUTO CHANGER

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM115

Page 128: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

116 CARE OF DISC

B850A02F-AAT

Proper Handling

B850A01L

Handle your disc as shown. Do not drop thedisc. Hold the disc so you will not leave finger-prints on the surface. If the surface is scratched,it may cause the pickup to skip signal tracks. Donot affix tape, paper, or gummed labels on thedisc. Do not write on the disc.

Damaged Disc

Do not attempt to play damaged, warped orcracked discs. These could severely damagethe playback mechanism.

Storage

When not in use, place your discs in theirindividual case and store them in a cool placeaway from the sun, heat, and dust.Do not grip or pull out the disc with your handwhile the disc is being pulled into the unit by theself loading mechanism.

Keep Your Discs Clean

B850A02L

Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface of a disccould cause the pickup to skip signal tracks.Wipe the surface clean with a clean soft cloth.If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen a cleansoft cloth in a solution of mild neutral detergentto wipe it clean.

B860A01A-AAT

Proper care of your cassette tapes will extendthe tape life and increase your listening enjoy-ment. Always protect your tapes and cassettecases from direct sunlight, severely cold anddusty conditions. When not in use, cassettesshould always be stored in the original protec-tive cassette case. When the vehicle is very hotor cold, allow the interior temperature to becomemore comfortable before listening to your cas-settes.

B860A01L

CARE OF CASSETTE TAPES

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM116

Page 129: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

117

B860A03L

Head

Cotton applicator

B860B02L

B860A02L

o Store cassettes in a cool, dry place with theopen side facing down to prevent dust fromsetting in the cassette body.

o Avoid repeated fast reverse usage to replayone given tune or tape section. This cancause poor tape winding to occur, and even-tually cause excessive internal drag andpoor audio quality in the cassette. If thisoccurs, it can sometimes be corrected byfast winding the tape from end to end severaltimes. If this does not correct the problem, donot continue to use the tape in your vehicle.

o The playback head, capstan and pinch roll-ers will develop a coating of tape residue thatcan result in deterioration of sound quality,such as a wavering sound. They should becleaned monthly using a commercially avail-able head cleaning tape or special solutionavailable from audio specialty shops. Followthe supplier's directions carefully and neveroil any part of the tape player unit.

o Always be sure that the tape is tightly woundon its reel before inserting in the player.Rotate a pencil in the drive sprockets to windup any slack.

o Never leave a cassette inserted in the playerwhen not being played. This could damagethe tape player unit and the cassette tape.

o We strongly recommend against the use oftapes longer than C-60 (60 minutes total).Tapes such as C-120 or C-180 are very thinand do not perform as well in the automotiveenvironment.

o Be sure that the cassette label is not looseor peeling off or tape ejection may be difficult.

o Never touch or soil the actual audio tapesurfaces.

o Keep all magnetized objects, such as elec-tric motors, speakers or transformers awayfrom your cassette tapes and tape playerunit.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM117

Page 130: XG350_2005.pdf

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

118 GLASS ANTENNA

B870D03L

B870D02Y-GAT

When the radio power switch is turned on whilethe ignition key is in either the "ON" or "ACC"position, your car will receive both AM and FMbroadcast signals through the antenna in therear window glass.

RADIO "ON"CAUTION:

o Do not clean the inner side of the rearwindow glass with an abrasive type ofglass cleaner or use a scraper to removeforeign deposits from the inner surfaceof the glass as this may cause damage tothe antenna elements.

o Avoid adding metallic coating (Someaftermarket window tinting has metalliccontents). These can disturb receivingAM and FM broadcast signals.

!NOTE:Look at a tape before you insert it.If the tape is loose, tighten it by turning oneof the hubs with a pencil or your finger.If the label is peeling off, do not put it in thedrive mechanism.Do not leave tapes sitting where they areexposed to hot, warm, or high humidity,such as on top of the dashboard or in theplayer.If a tape is exposed to excessively hot orcold, let it reach a moderate temperaturebefore putting it in the player.

xgflhma-1.p65 6/16/04, 3:05 PM118

Page 131: XG350_2005.pdf

Before Starting the Engine ............................................ 2-3Key Positions ................................................................ 2-3Starting .......................................................................... 2-4Automatic Transaxle ..................................................... 2-5Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................... 2-8Traction Control System (TCS) .................................... 2-9Good Braking Practices .............................................. 2-10Driving for Economy ................................................... 2-11Winter Driving ............................................................. 2-13Trailer or Vehicle Towing ............................................ 2-15Vehicle Load Limit ....................................................... 2-19

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

22

xgflhma-2.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM1

Page 132: XG350_2005.pdf

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2

! WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!C010A02L-AAT

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately.

o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a change in thesound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the exhaust system checked as soon aspossible by your Hyundai dealer.

o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your garage any longerthan it takes to start the engine and back the car out.

o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area with the air intake setat "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.If you must drive with the trunk open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:

1. Close all windows.2. Open side vents.3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are kept clear of snow,ice, leaves or other obstructions.

! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishingsin a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. Inaddition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the Stateof California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

xgflhma-2.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM2

Page 133: XG350_2005.pdf

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

3

2KEY POSITIONSCOMBINATION IGNITION SWITCHBEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

!

C020A01A-AAT

Before you start the engine, you should always:

1. Look around the vehicle to be sure there areno flat tires, puddles of oil, water or otherindications of possible trouble.

2. After entering the car, check to be sure theparking brake is engaged.

3. Check that all windows, and lights are clean.4. Check that the interior and exterior mirrors

are clean and in position.5. Check your seat, seatback and headrest to

be sure they are in their proper positions.6. Lock all the doors.7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure that all

other occupants have fastened theirs.8. Turn off all lights and accessories that are

not needed.9. When you turn the ignition switch to "ON",

check that all appropriate warning lights areoperating and that you have sufficient fuel.

10.Check the operation of warning lights and allbulbs when key is in the "ON" position.

C030A01L-AAT

To Start the Engine

o Place the shift lever in "P" (park) and de-press the brake pedal fully.

o To start the engine, insert the ignition key andturn it to the "START" position. Release it assoon as the engine starts. Do not hold thekey in the "START" position for more than 15seconds.

NOTE:o For safety, the engine will not start if the

shift lever is not in "P" or "N" Position.o The ignition key cannot be turned from

"ACC" position to "LOCK" position un-less the shift lever is in the "P" (Park)position or the negative battery terminalis disconnected from the battery. Toremove the key, always confirm that theshift lever is securely positioned in "P"(Park).

o For additional information about start-ing, see page 2-4.

C040A01A-AAT

WARNING:The engine should not be turned off or thekey removed from the ignition key cylinderwhile the vehicle is in motion. The steeringwheel is locked by removing the key.

o "START"The engine is started in this position. It will crankuntil you release the key.

NOTE:Do not hold the key in the "START" positionfor more than 15 seconds.

LOCK

ACC

ON

START

C040A01E-1

xgflhma-2.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM3

Page 134: XG350_2005.pdf

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

4 STARTING

!

C070C02A-AAT

To remove the ignition keyC050A01A-AAT

1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position.2. Turn the ignition key counterclockwise from

the "ACC" position to the "LOCK" position.3. The key can be removed in the "LOCK"

position.

WARNING:Never run the engine in a closed or poorlyventilated area any longer than is needed tomove your car in or out of the area. Thecarbon monoxide gas emitted is odorlessand can cause serious injury or death.

C070C01E-1

C050A01E-1

o "ON"When the key is in the "ON" position, the ignitionis on and all accessories may be turned on. Ifthe engine is not running, the key should not beleft in the "ON" position. This will discharge thebattery and may also damage the ignition sys-tem.

o "ACC"With the key in the "ACC" position, some elec-trical accessories (radio, etc.) may be oper-ated.

o "LOCK"The key can be removed or inserted in thisposition.To protect against theft, the steering wheellocks by removing the key.

NOTE:To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key,and then turn the steering wheel and keysimultaneously.

LOCK

ACC

ON

START

xgflhma-2.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM4

Page 135: XG350_2005.pdf

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

5

2AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

C050B01L-AAT

Normal Conditions:The Starting Procedure:

1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt.2. Depress the brake pedal fully and place the

selector lever in "P" (park) position.3. After turning the ignition key to the "ON"

position, make certain all warning lights andgauges are functioning properly before start-ing the engine.

4. Turn the ignition key to the "Start" positionand release it when the engine starts.After the engine has started, allow the engineto run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placingthe vehicle in gear.The starter should not be operated for morethan 15 seconds at a time. Wait 15-30 sec-onds between starting attempts to protectthe starter from overheating.

C090A02L-AAT

The highly efficient Hyundai automatic transaxlehas five forward speeds and one reverse speed.The individual speeds are selected automati-cally, depending on the position of the speedselector lever. The selector lever has 2 gates;the main gate and the manual gate.

NOTE:For information on manual gate operation,refer to "Sports Mode".

In the main gate, the selector lever has 5positions, and is equipped with a button to avoidinadvertent wrong selection.

NOTE:Depress the brake pedal and pushthe button when shifting.

Push the button when shifting.

The selector lever can be shiftedfreely.

The first few shifts on a new vehicle, or if thebattery has been disconnected may besomewhat abrupt. This is a normal condi-tion, and the shifting sequence will adjustafter shifts are cycled a few times by theT.C.M (Transaxle Control Module).

HXG065

C090A02L

xgflhma-2.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM5

Page 136: XG350_2005.pdf

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

6

C090F02L-AAT

Sports Mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion,sports mode is selected by pushing the selectorlever from the "D" position into the manual gate.To return to "D" range operation, push theselector lever back into the main gate.In sports mode, moving the selector lever back-wards and forwards can make rapid gearshiftssimple. In contrast to a manual transaxle, thesports mode allows gearshifts with the accel-erator pedal depressed.

UP (+) : Push the lever forward once to shiftup one gear.

DOWN (-) : Pull the lever backward once toshift down one gear.

HXG200

C090B01A-AAT

The function of each position is as fol-lows:

o P (Park):

Use to hold the vehicle in place when parked orwhile starting the engine. Whenever parking thecar, apply the parking brake and shift the selec-tor lever to the "P" (Park) position.

C090E01L-AAT

o D (Drive):

Use for normal driving. This position is used formost city and highway driving, for starting froma full stop to maximum speed. The transaxle willautomatically shift through a five gear sequence.

C090D02A-AAT

o N (Neutral):

In the "N" position, the transaxle is in neutral,which means that no gears are engaged. Theengine can be started with the shift lever in "N"position, although this is not recommendedexcept if the engine stalls while the car ismoving.

C090C01A-AAT

o R(Reverse):

Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring the car toa complete stop before shifting the selectorlever to "R" position.

The indicator lights in the instrument clusterindicate the selector lever position when theignition is switched "ON". During sports modeoperation, green lights indicate the gear cur-rently in use.

CAUTION:Never place the selector lever in the "P"(Park) position unless the vehicle is fullystopped. Failure to observe this cautionwill cause severe damage to the transaxle.

!

CAUTION:Never shift into "R" or "P" position while thevehicle is moving.

!

xgflhma-2.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM6

Page 137: XG350_2005.pdf

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

7

2

CAUTION:o In sports mode the driver must execute

shifts in accordance with prevailing roadconditions, taking care to keep the en-gine speed below the red zone. For theengine protection, upward shifts aremade automatically when the enginerpm reaches the red zone.

o By rapidly moving the selector leverbackwards (-) twice, it is possible to skipone gear, i.e., 3rd to 1st, 4th to 2nd or 5thto 3rd. Since sudden engine brakingand/or rapid acceleration can cause aloss of traction, however, downshiftsmust be made carefully in accordancewith the vehicle's speed.

!

C090H01L-GAT

NOTE:o For smooth and safe operation, depress

the brake pedal when shifting from "Neu-tral" position or "Park" position to aforward or reverse gear.

o The ignition key must be in the "ON"position and the brake pedal fully de-pressed in order to move the shift leverfrom the "P" (Park) position to any of theother positions.

o It is always possible to shift from "R","N", "D" position to "P" position. Thevehicle must be fully stopped to avoidtransaxle damage.

C090I02L-GAT

CAUTION:o Shift into "R" and "P" position only when

the vehicle has completely stopped.o Do not accelerate the engine in reverse

or any of the forward positions with thebrakes applied.

o Always apply the footbrake when shift-ing from "P" or "N", to "R" or "D" posi-tion.

o Do not use the "P" (Park) position inplace of the parking brake. Always setthe parking brake, shift the transaxleinto "P" (Park) position and turn off theignition when you leave the vehicle, evenmomentarily. Never leave the vehicleunattended while the engine is running.

o Check the automatic transaxle fluid levelregularly, and add fluid as necessary.

o See the maintenance schedule for theproper fluid recomendation.

!

NOTE:o In sports mode, only the five forward

gears can be selected. To reverse or parkthe vehicle, move the selector lever tothe "R" or "P" position as required.

o In sports mode, downward shifts aremade automatically when the vehicleslows down. When the vehicle stops, 1stgear is automatically selected.

o To maintain the required levels of ve-hicle performance and safety, the sys-tem may not execute certain gearshiftswhen the selector lever is operated.

o Before driving away from a stop on aslippery road, push the selector leverforward into the +(UP) position. Thiscauses the transaxle to shift into 2ndgear which is better for smooth drivingaway on a slippery road. Push the selec-tor lever to the -(DOWN) side to shiftback to 1st gear.

xgflhma-2.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM7

Page 138: XG350_2005.pdf

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

8 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEMGOOD DRIVING PRACTICES

!C120A02A-AAT

(If Installed)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designedto prevent wheel lock-up during sudden brakingor on hazardous road surfaces. The ABS con-trol module monitors the wheel speed and con-trols the pressure applied to each brake. Thus,in emergency situations or on slick roads, ABSwill increase vehicle control during braking.

NOTE:During ABS operation, a pulsation may befelt in the brake pedal when the brakes areapplied. Also, a noise may be heard in theengine compartment while braking. Theseconditions are normal and indicate that theanti-lock brake system is functioning prop-erly.

C090N03Y-AAT

o Never move the gear selector lever from "P"or "N" to any other position with the accelera-tor pedal depressed.

o Never move the gear selector lever into "P"when the vehicle is in motion.

o Be sure the car is completely stopped beforeyou attempt to shift into "R".

o Never take the car out of gear and coastdown a hill. This may be extremely hazard-ous. Always leave the car in gear whenmoving.

o Do not "ride" the brakes. This can causethem to overheat and malfunction. Instead,when you are driving down a long hill, slowdown and shift to a lower gear. When you dothis, engine braking will help slow the car.

o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear.Otherwise, the lower gear may not be en-gaged.

o Always use the parking brake. Do not de-pend on placing the transaxle in "P" to keepthe car from moving.

o Exercise extreme caution when driving on aslippery surface. Be especially careful whenbraking, accelerating or shifting gears. On aslippery surface, an abrupt change in ve-hicle speed can cause the drive wheels tolose traction and the vehicle to go out ofcontrol.

WARNING:o The risk of rollover is greatly increased if

you lose control of your vehicle at high-way speeds.

o Loss of control often occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadway andthe driver oversteers to reenter the road-way.

o In the event your vehicle leaves the road-way, do not steer sharply. Instead, slowdown before pulling back into the travellanes.

o In a collision crash, an unbelted personis significantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seatbelt.

o Never exceed posted speed limits.o Excessive depressing of the accelerater

pedal in slippery driving conditions suchas pulling out of deep snow or mud maycause severe damage to the transaxle.Rocking the vehicle is not recommended.Rather, use an appropriate towingmethod.

xgflhma-2.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM8

Page 139: XG350_2005.pdf

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

9

2TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM(TCS)

!

! WARNING:Your ABS will not prevent accidents due toimproper or dangerous driving maneuvers.Even though vehicle control is improvedduring emergency braking, always main-tain a safe distance between you and ob-jects ahead. Vehicle speeds should alwaysbe reduced during extreme road condi-tions.The braking distance for cars equippedwith an anti-lock braking system may belonger than for those without it in thefollowing road conditions.During these conditions the vehicle shouldbe driven at reduced speeds.

o Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.o With tire chains installed.o On roads where the road surface is pit-

ted or has different surface height.

The safety features of an ABS equippedvehicle should not be tested by high speeddriving or cornering. This could endangerthe safety of yourself or others.

C300A02Y-GAT

(If Installed)

!

On slippery road surfaces, the traction controlsystem (TCS) limits the drive wheels fromspinning excessively, thus helping the car toaccelerate. It also provides sufficient drivingforce and steering performance as the car turnsat accelerated speeds.

SLIP Control

Limits the drive wheels from spinning exces-sively during starting or while making acceler-ated turns on slippery roads to avoid losing thedriving force of the front wheels.

CAUTION:When the TCS indicator blinks, SLIP controlhas been activated. It also means that theroad is slippery or your car is acceleratingexcessively. In this situation, gently releasefoot pressure from the accelerator pedaland maintain moderate speed.

WARNING:Traction control is only a driving aid; allnormal precautions for driving in inclementweather and on slippery driving surfacesshould be observed.

C300A02L-A

Driving hints

TCS does not actively apply brakes. Be sure todecelerate the car sufficiently before enteringcurves.

xgflhma-2.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM9

Page 140: XG350_2005.pdf

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

10

!

C130A01O-BAT

GOOD BRAKING PRACTICES

WARNING:Nothing should be carried on top of theshelf panel behind the rear seat. If therewere an accident or a sudden stop, suchobjects could move forward and causedamage to the vehicle or injure the occu-pants.

o After being parked, check to be sure theparking brake is not engaged and that theparking brake indicator light is out beforedriving away.

o Driving through water may get the brakeswet. They can also get wet when the car iswashed. Wet brakes can be dangerous!Your car will not stop as quickly if the brakesare wet. Wet brakes may cause the car topull to one side. To dry the brakes, apply thebrakes lightly until the braking action returnsto normal, taking care to keep the car undercontrol at all times. If the braking action doesnot return to normal, stop as soon as it is safeto do so and call your Hyundai dealer forassistance.

C300D02L-GAT

Indicators and Warning

The indicators should illuminate when the igni-tion key is turned to "ON" or "START" but shouldgo out after three seconds.If the indicators do not illuminate, or the TCS orTCS-OFF indicator does not go out after 3seconds, have it checked by an authorizeddealer.

Should there be any unusual conditions in thedevice while driving, TCS-OFF indicator illumi-nates as a warning.If TCS-OFF indicator illuminates, pull your carto a safe place and stop the engine.Then, start the engine again to check if the TCS-OFF indicator goes out.

If the indicator remains lit even after the enginehas been started, have your car checked by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

NOTE:1) When the TCS-OFF indicator illuminates,

traction control is automatically deacti-vated for safety.

2) This warning function is not providedwhen the driver selects the TCS-OFFmode.

C300B01L-GAT

TCS ON/OFF Mode

In the TCS ON mode, the indicator in theinstrument cluster will not be illuminated.To switch the TCS OFF mode, press the TCSswitch . The SLIP control will be deactivated andthe TCS indicator in the instrument cluster willbe illuminated.

NOTE:1) The TCS mode will automatically be

turned ON after the engine is turned offand restarted.

2) When the traction control is operatingproperly, you can feel a slight pulsationin the vehicle. This is only the effect ofbrake control and indicates nothingunusual.

3) When the engine starts, a click is heardfrom the engine compartment; however,this is only the sound of traction controlbeing checked.

4) When moving out of the mud or freshsnow, pressing the accelerator pedalmay not cause the engine speed to in-crease due to TCS operation.

xgflhma-2.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM10

Page 141: XG350_2005.pdf

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

11

2DRIVING FOR ECONOMY

o Don't coast down hills with the car out of gear.This is extremely hazardous. Keep the carin gear at all times, use the brakes to slowdown, then shift to a lower gear so that enginebraking will help you maintain a safe speed.

o Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting yourfoot on the brake pedal while driving can bedangerous because it can result in the brakesoverheating and losing their effectiveness. Italso increases the wear of the brake com-ponents.

o If a tire goes flat while you are driving, applythe brakes gently and keep the car pointedstraight ahead while you slow down. Whenyou are moving slowly enough for it to be safeto do so, pull off the road and stop in a safeplace.

o Don't let your car creep forward. To avoidcreeping forward, keep your foot firmly onthe brake pedal when the car is stopped.

o Use caution when parking on a hill. Engagethe parking brake and place the gear selec-tor lever in "P". If your car is facing downhill,turn the front wheels into the curb to helpkeep the car from rolling. If your car is facinguphill, turn the front wheels away from thecurb to help keep the car from rolling. If thereis no curb or if it is required by other condi-tions to keep the car from rolling, block thewheels.

o Under some conditions your parking brakecan freeze in the engaged position. This ismost likely to happen when there is an ac-cumulation of snow or ice around or near therear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If thereis a risk that the parking brake may freeze,apply it only temporarily while you put thegear selector lever in "P" and block the rearwheels so the car cannot roll. Then releasethe parking brake.

o Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade withthe accelerator pedal. This can cause thetransaxle to overheat. Always use the brakepedal or parking brake.

C140A01A-AAT

You can save fuel and get more miles from yourcar if you follow these suggestions:

o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderaterate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts and maintain a steady cruisingspeed. Don't race between stoplights. Try toadjust your speed to that of the other trafficso you don't have to change speeds unnec-essarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-sible. Always maintain a safe distance fromother vehicles so you can avoid unneces-sary braking. This also reduces brake wear.

o Drive at a moderate speed. The faster youdrive, the more fuel your car uses. Driving ata moderate speed, especially on the high-way, is one of the most effective ways toreduce fuel consumption.

o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. Thiscan increase fuel consumption and alsoincrease wear on these components. Inaddition, driving with your foot resting on thebrake pedal may cause the brakes to over-heat, which reduces their effectiveness andmay lead to more serious consequences.

o Take care of your tires. Keep them inflatedto the recommended pressure. Incorrectinflation, either too much or too little, resultsin unnecessary tire wear. Check the tirepressures at least once a month.

xgflhma-2.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM11

Page 142: XG350_2005.pdf

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

12 SMOOTH CORNERING

o Be sure that the wheels are aligned cor-rectly. Improper alignment can result fromhitting curbs or driving too fast over irregularsurfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tirewear and may also result in other problemsas well as greater fuel consumption.

o Keep your car in good condition. For betterfuel economy and reduced maintenancecosts, maintain your car in accordance withthe maintenance schedule in Section 5. Ifyou drive your car in severe conditions,more frequent maintenance is required (seeSection 5 for details).

o Keep your car clean. For maximum service,your Hyundai should be kept clean and freeof corrosive materials. It is especially impor-tant that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed toaccumulate on the underside of the car. Thisextra weight can result in increased fuelconsumption and also contribute to corro-sion.

o Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessaryweight in your car. Weight reduces fueleconomy.

o Don't let the engine idle longer than neces-sary. If you are waiting (and not in traffic),turn off your engine and restart only whenyou're ready to go.

o Remember, your Hyundai does not requireextended warm-up. As soon as the engineis running smoothly, you can drive away. Invery cold weather, however, give your en-gine a slightly longer warm-up period.

o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. Luggingis driving too slowly in too high a gear result-ing in the engine bucking. If this happens,shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is racingthe engine beyond its safe limit. This can beavoided by shifting at the recommendedspeeds.

o Use your air conditioning sparingly. The airconditioning system is operated by enginepower so your fuel economy is reducedwhen you use it.

C150A01A-AAT

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners,especially when roads are wet. Ideally, cornersshould always be taken under gentle accelera-tion. If you follow these suggestions, tire wearwill be held to a minimum.

xgflhma-2.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM12

Page 143: XG350_2005.pdf

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

13

2WINTER DRIVING

C160B01A-AAT

Snowy or Icy Conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may benecessary to use snow tires or to install tirechains on your tires. If snow tires are needed,it is necessary to select tires equivalent in sizeand type of the original equipment tires. Failureto do so may adversely affect the safety andhandling of your car. Furthermore, speeding,rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications,and sharp turns are potentially very hazardouspractices.During deceleration, use engine braking to thefullest extent. Sudden brake applications onsnowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur.You need to keep sufficient distance betweenthe vehicle in operation in front and your vehicle.Also, apply the brake gently. It should be notedthat installing tire chains on the tire will providea greater driving force, but will not prevent sideskids.

NOTE:Tire chains are not legal in all states. Checkstate laws before fitting tire chains.

C160C01A-AAT

Use High Quality Ethylene GlycolCoolant

Your Hyundai is delivered with high qualityethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. Itis the only type of coolant that should be usedbecause it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-ing system, lubricates the water pump andprevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replen-ish your coolant in accordance with the main-tenance schedule in Section 5. Before winter,have your coolant tested to assure that itsfreezing point is sufficient for the temperaturesanticipated during the winter.

C160D01A-AAT

Check Battery and Cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the batterysystem. Visually inspect the battery and cablesas described in Section 6. The level of chargein your battery can be checked by your Hyundaidealer or a service station.

C160A01A-AAT

The more severe weather conditions of winterresult in greater wear and other problems. Tominimize the problems of winter driving, youshould follow these suggestions:

xgflhma-2.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM13

Page 144: XG350_2005.pdf

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

14

C160J01A-AAT

Don't Let Ice and Snow AccumulateUnderneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice can buildup under the fenders and interfere with thesteering. When driving in severe winter condi-tions where this may happen, you should peri-odically check underneath the car to be sure themovement of the front wheels and the steeringcomponents is not obstructed.

C160I01L-AAT

Don't Let Your Parking Brake Freeze

Under some conditions your parking brake canfreeze in the engaged position. This is mostlikely to happen when there is an accumulationof snow or ice around or near the rear brakesor if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk theparking brake may freeze, apply it only tempo-rarily while you put the gear selector lever in "P"and block the rear wheels so the car cannot roll.Then release the parking brake.

C160E01A-AAT

Change to "Winter Weight" Oil ifNecessary

In some climates it is recommended that a lowerviscosity "winter weight" oil be used during coldweather. See Section 9 for recommendations.If you aren't sure what weight oil you should use,consult your Hyundai dealer.

C160F01A-AAT

Check Spark Plugs and IgnitionSystem

Inspect your spark plugs as described in Sec-tion 6 and replace them if necessary. Alsocheck all ignition wiring and components to besure they are not cracked, worn or damaged inany way.

C160G01A-AAT

To Keep Locks from Freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt anapproved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the keyopening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it withan approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. Ifthe lock is frozen internally, you may be able tothaw it out by using a heated key. Handle theheated key with care to avoid injury.

C160H01A-AAT

Use Approved Anti-Freeze in WindowWasher System

To keep the water in the window washer systemfrom freezing, add an approved anti-freezesolution in accordance with instructions on thecontainer. Window washer anti-freeze is avail-able from Hyundai dealers and most auto partsoutlets. Do not use engine coolant or other typesof anti-freeze as these may damage the finish.

xgflhma-2.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM14

Page 145: XG350_2005.pdf

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

15

2TRAILER OR VEHICLE TOWING

C160K01A-AAT

Carry Emergency Equipment

Depending on the severity of the weather whereyou drive your car, you should carry appropri-ate emergency equipment. Some of the itemsyou may want to carry include tire chains, towstraps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares,sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper,gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

C170A01A-AAT

HIGHER SPEED MOTORING

Pre-Trip Inspections

1. Tires:Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specifica-tion. Low tire inflation pressures will result inoverheating and possible failure of the tires.Avoid using worn or damaged tires which mayresult in reduced traction or tire failure.

NOTE:Never exceed the maximum tire inflationpressure shown on the tires.

C180A01A-AAT

USE OF LIGHTS

Check your lights regularly for correct opera-tion and always keep them clean. When drivingduring the day in conditions of poor visibility, itis helpful to drive with headlights on low beam.This enables you to be seen as well as to see.

C190A01A-AAT

If you are considering towing with your car, youshould first check with your State's Departmentof Motor Vehicles to determine their legal re-quirements.Since laws vary from state to state the require-ments for towing trailers, cars, or other types ofvehicles or apparatus may differ. Ask yourHyundai dealer for further details before towing.

CAUTION:Do not do any towing with your car duringits first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) in order toallow the engine to properly break in. Fail-ure to heed this caution may result in seri-ous engine or transaxle damage.

2. Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:High speed travel consumes more fuel thanurban motoring. Do not forget to check bothengine coolant and engine oil.

3. Drive belt:A loose or damaged drive belt may result inoverheating of the engine.

C190B01S-AAT

Trailer Hitches

Select the proper hitch and ball combination,making sure that its location is compatible withthat of the trailer or vehicle being towed.Use a quality non-equalizing hitch which distrib-utes the tongue load uniformly throughout thechassis.

The hitch should be bolted securely to the carand installed by a qualified technician. DO NOTUSE A HITCH DESIGNED FOR TEMPORARYINSTALLATION AND NEVER USE ONE THATATTACHES ONLY TO THE BUMPER.

xgflhma-2.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM15

Page 146: XG350_2005.pdf

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

16

C190E02L-AAT

Trailer Weight Limit

o Keep the tongue load 10% of the total trailerload.

o

o Tongue loads can be increased or de-creased by redistributing the load in thetrailer.This can be verified by checking the totalweight of the loaded trailer and then checkingthe load on the tongue.

C190E01L

Tongue load Total trailer weight

C190D01A-AAT

Safety Chains

Should the hitch connection between your carand the trailer or vehicle you are towing fail, thetrailer or vehicle could wander dangerouslyacross other lanes of traffic and ultimately leavethe roadway. To eliminate this potentially dan-gerous situation, safety chains, attached be-tween your car and the trailer or towed vehicle,are required in most states.

C190C01Y-AAT

Trailer Brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,make sure it conforms to federal and/or localregulations and that it is properly installed andoperating correctly.

NOTE:If you tow a trailer or vehicle, your car willrequire more frequent maintenance due tothe additional load. See Maintenance UnderSevere Usage Conditions" on page 5-6.

CAUTION:o Never connect a trailer brake system

directly to the vehicle brake system.o When towing a trailer on steep grades (in

excess of 12%) pay close attention to theengine coolant temperature gauge toensure the engine does not overheat. Ifthe needle of the coolant temperaturegauge moves across the dial towards"H" (HOT), pull over and stop as soon asit is safe to do so, and allow the engineto idle until it cools down. You mayproceed once the engine has cooledsufficiently.

!

Tongue load

Total trailer weightx 100 = 10 % (MAX)

xgflhma-2.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM16

Page 147: XG350_2005.pdf

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

17

2

!

Trailer

2000 (907)

1000 (453)

Maximum Towable Weight2. The total gross vehicle weight with trailermust not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) shown on thevehicle identification plate (see page 8-2). The total gross vehicle weight is thecombined weight of the vehicle, driver,all passengers and their luggage, cargo,hitch, trailer tongue load and other op-tional equipment.

Lbs. (kg)

Tongue

200 (90.7)

100 (45.3)

With Brake

Without Brake

C190E02L

Gross axle weight Gross vehicle weight

!

NOTE:1. Never load the trailer with more weight in

the back than in the front. About 60% ofthe trailer load should be in the front halfon the trailer and the remaining 40% inthe rear.

3. The front or rear axle weight must notexceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) shown on the vehicle identifi-cation plate (see page 8-2). It is possiblethat your towing package does not ex-ceed the GVWR but exceeds the GAWR.Improper trailer loading and/or too muchluggage in the trunk can overload therear axle. Redistribute the load and checkthe axle weight again.

CAUTION:The following specifications are recom-mended when towing a trailer. The loadedtrailer weight cannot safely exceed the val-ues in the chart.

WARNING:o Improperly loading your vehicle and

trailer can seriously affect its steeringand braking performance causing acrash which could cause serious injuryor death.

o Towing a trailer affected vehicle han-dling and braking.

o Drive more slowly when towing a trailerand allow more distance when braking.

o Be careful when driving in slippery andwindy conditions.

o Be careful when turning and while driv-ing up and down hills.

o Do not exceed 45 mph or the postedtowing speed limit, whichever is lower.

xgflhma-2.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM17

Page 148: XG350_2005.pdf

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

18

9. If the trailer has electric brakes, start yourvehicle and trailer moving, and then apply thetrailer brake controller by hand to be sure thebrakes are working. This lets you checkyour electrical connection at the same time.

10.During your trip, check occasionally to besure that the load is secure, and that thelights and any trailer brakes are still working.

11.Avoid jerky starts, sudden acceleration orsudden stops.

12.Avoid sharp turns and rapid lane changes.13.Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long

or too frequently. This could cause the brakesto overheat, resulting in reduced brakingefficiency.

14.When going down a hill, shift into a lower gearand use the engine braking effect.When ascending a long grade, downshift thetransaxle to a lower gear and reduce speedto reduce chances of engine overloadingand/or overheating.

15.If you have to stop while going uphill, do nothold the vehicle in place by pressing on theaccelerator. This can cause the automatictransaxle to overheat. Use the parking brakeor footbrake.

NOTE:When towing check transaxle fluid morefrequently.

CAUTION:If overheating should occur when towing,(the temperature gauge reads near red zone),taking the following action may reduce oreliminate the problem.

1. Turn off the air conditioner.2. Reduce highway speed.3. Select a lower gear when going uphill.4. While in stop and go traffic, place the

gear selector in park or neutral and idlethe engine at a higher speed.

!C190F01L-AAT

Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips

1. Before towing, check hitch and safety chainconnections as well as proper operation ofthe trailer running lights, brake lights, andturn signals.

2. Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed (Less than 60 mph)

3. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normalconditions.

4. To maintain engine braking efficiency, do nottow a trailer with the transaxle engaged in anoverdrive gear.

5. Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

6. Check the condition and air pressure of alltires on the trailer and your car. Low tirepressure can seriously affect the handling.Also check the spare tire.

7. The vehicle/trailer combination is more af-fected by crosswind and buffeting.When being passed by a large vehicle, keepa constant speed and steer straight ahead.If there is too much wind buffeting, slow downto get out of the other vehicle's air turbulence.

8. When parking your car and trailer, especiallyon a hill, be sure to follow all the normalprecautions. Turn your front wheel into thecurb, set the parking brake firmly, and put thetransaxle in Park. In addition, place wheelchocks at each of the trailer's tires.

xgflhma-2.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM18

Page 149: XG350_2005.pdf

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

19

2

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit(1)Locate the statement "The combined

weight of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX pounds'' on yourvehicle's placard.

(2)Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

(3)Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXXkilograms or XXX pounds.

(4)The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if the"XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs, andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

(5)Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calcu-lated in Step 4.

(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this re-duces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

C190F01L-AAT

Tire and Loading Information Label

I030B01XG

The tire label located on the driver'sdoor edge gives the original tire size,cold tire pressures recommended foryour vehicle, the number of people thatcan be in your vehicle and vehiclecapacity weight.

xgflhma-2.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM19

Page 150: XG350_2005.pdf

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

20

Example 1

Item

A

B

C

C190F01JM C190F02JM C190F03JM

Total

1400 lbs

(640 kg)

300 lbs

(140 kg)

1100 lbs

(500 kg)

Description

Vehicle Capacity Weight

Subtract Occupant Weight

150 lbs (70 kg) × 2

Available Cargo and

Luggage weight

Total

1400 lbs

(640 kg)

860 lbs

(390 kg)

540 lbs

(250 kg)

Example 2

Item

A

B

C

Description

Vehicle Capacity Weight

Subtract Occupant Weight

172 lbs (78 kg) x 5

Available Cargo Weight

Total

1400 lbs

(640 kg)

750 lbs

(350 kg)

650 lbs

(290 kg)

Item

A

B

C

Description

Vehicle Capacity Weight

Subtract Occupant Weight

150 lbs (70 kg) x 5

Available Cargo and

Luggage Weight

Example 3

A B CA B C A B C

xgflhma-2.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM20

Page 151: XG350_2005.pdf

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

21

2

Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loadinginformation label for specific informa-tion about your vehicle’s capacity weightand seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers andcargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s capacity weight.

!

This label also tells you the maximumweights that can be supported by thefront and rear axles, called Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on your front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weigh stationand weigh your vehicle. Your dealer canhelp you with this. Be sure to spread outyour load equally on both sides of thecenterline.

WARNING:o Never exceed the GVWR for your

vehicle, or the GAWR for either thefront or rear axle.

o Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR, or eitherthe maximum front or rear GAWR.If you do, parts on your vehiclecan break, and it can change theway your vehicle handles. Thiscould cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of your vehicle.

C190G01L-AAT

Compliance Label

The compliance label is located on thedriver's side of the center piller outerpanel.

The label shows the size of your originaltires and the inflation pressures neededto obtain the gross weight capacity ofyour vehicle. This is called the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). TheGVWR includes the weight of the ve-hicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.

C190G01JM

xgflhma-2.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM21

Page 152: XG350_2005.pdf

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

22

!NOTE:o Overloading your vehicle may

cause damage. Repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Donot overload your vehicle.

o Using heavier suspension com-ponents to get added durabilitymight not change your weight rat-ings. Ask your dealer to help youload your vehicle the right way.

The label will help you decide how muchcargo and installed equipment yourvehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle –like suitcases, tools, packages, or any-thing else – they more as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash, the itemswill keep going and can cause an injuryif they strikes the driver or a passenger.

WARNING:Items you carry inside your vehiclecan strike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in a crash.

o Put things in the cargo area ofyour vehicle. Try to spread theweight evenly.

o Never stack items, like suitcases,inside the vehicle above the topsof the seats.

o Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

o When you carry something insidethe vehicle, secure it.

o Do not drive with a seat foldeddown unless necessary.

xgflhma-2.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM22

Page 153: XG350_2005.pdf

If the Engine Will Not Start ............................................ 3-2Jump Starting ................................................................ 3-3If the Engine Overheats ................................................ 3-4Spare Tire ..................................................................... 3-5If You Have a Flat Tire .................................................. 3-5If Your Car Must Be Towed ........................................ 3-11Emergency Towing ..................................................... 3-12If You Lose Your Keys ................................................ 3-13

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

33

xgflhma-3.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM1

Page 154: XG350_2005.pdf

32

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

!

D010A01A-AAT D010B01L-AAT

If Engine Doesn't Turn Over or TurnsOver Slowly

D010C02A-AAT

If Engine Turns Over Normally but DoesNot Start

1. Check fuel level.2. With the key in the "OFF" position, check all

connectors at ignition coil and spark plugs.Reconnect any that may be disconnected orloose.

3. Check the fuel line in the engine compart-ment.

4. If the engine still does not start, call a Hyundaidealer or seek other qualified assistance.

D010D01A-AAT

If Engine Stalls While Driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping astraight line. Move cautiously off the road toa safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.3. Try to start the engine again. If your vehicle

will not start, contact a Hyundai dealer orseek other qualified assistance.

WARNING:If the engine will not start, do not push orpull the car to start it. This could result in acollision or cause other damage. In addi-tion, push or pull starting may cause thecatalytic converter to be overloaded andcreate a fire hazard.

1. Be sure the gear selector lever is in "N" or "P"and the emergency brake is set.

2. Check the battery connections to be surethey are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dims orgoes out when you operate the starter, thebattery is discharged.

4. Check the starter connections to be surethey are securely tightened.

5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. Seeinstructions for "Jump Starting" on the fol-lowing pages.

D010B01L

xgflhma-3.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM2

Page 155: XG350_2005.pdf

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

3JUMP STARTING

D020A03A-AAT

WARNING:The gas produced by the battery during thejump-start operation is highly explosive. Ifthese instructions are not followed exactly,serious personal injury and damage to thevehicle may occur! If you are not sure howto follow this procedure, seek qualifiedassistance. Automobile batteries containsulfuric acid. This is poisonous and highlycorrosive. When jump starting, wear pro-tective glasses and be careful not to getacid on yourself, your clothing or on the car.

!

D020A01L-1

Booster battery

Dischargedbattery

o If you should accidentally get acid on yourskin or in your eyes, immediately removeany contaminated clothing and flush the areawith clear water for at least 15 minutes. Thenpromptly obtain medical attention. If youmust be transported to an emergency facil-ity, continue to apply water to the affectedarea with a sponge or cloth.

o The gas produced by the battery during thejump-start operation is highly explosive. Donot smoke or allow a spark or an open flamein the vicinity.

o The battery being used to provide the jumpstart must be 12-volt. If you cannot deter-mine that it is a 12-volt battery, do not attemptto use it for the jump start.

o To jump start a car with a discharged battery,follow this procedure exactly:

1. If the booster battery is installed in anothervehicle, be sure the two vehicles are nottouching.

2. Turn off all unnecessary lights and acces-sories in both vehicles.

3. Attach the clamps of the jumper cable in theexact location shown on the previous page.First, attach one clamp of the jumper cableto the positive (+) post or cable of the dis-charged battery. Then attach the other endof the same cable to the positive (+) post orcable of the booster battery. Next, using the

other cable, attach one clamp to the negative(-) post or cable of the booster battery. Thenattach the other end of that cable to a solidmetal part of the engine of the vehicle with thedischarged battery away from the battery.Do not connect the cable to any moving part.

4. Start the engine in the car with the boosterbattery and let it run for a few minutes. Thiswill help to assure that the booster battery isfully charged. During the jumping operation,run the engine in this vehicle at about 2,000rpm.

5. Start the engine in the car with the dis-charged battery using the normal startingprocedure. After the engine starts, leave thejumper cables connected and let the enginerun at fast idle or about 2,000 rpm for severalminutes.

6. Carefully remove the jumper cables in thereverse order of attachment.

If you do not know why your battery becamedischarged (because the lights were left on,etc.), have the charging system checked byyour Hyundai dealer.

xgflhma-3.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM3

Page 156: XG350_2005.pdf

34

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

WARNING:While the engine is running, keep hair,hands and clothing away from moving partssuch as the fan and drive belts to preventinjury.

5. If the water pump drive belt is broken orengine coolant is leaking out, stop the engineimmediately and call the nearest Hyundaidealer for assistance.

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. This can allow coolant to beblown out of the opening and cause seri-ous burns.

6. If you cannot find the cause of the overheat-ing, wait until the engine temperature hasreturned to normal. Then, if coolant has beenlost, carefully add coolant to the reservoir tobring the fluid level in the reservoir up to thehalfway mark.

7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for fur-ther signs of overheating. If overheatinghappens again, call a Hyundai dealer forassistance.

CAUTION:Serious loss of coolant indicates there is aleak in the cooling system and this shouldbe checked as soon as possible by a Hyundaidealer.

!

!

!D030A01L-AAT

If your temperature gauge indicates overheat-ing, you experience a loss of power, or hear loudpinging or knocking, the engine is probably toohot. If this happens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safeto do so.

2. Place the gear selector lever in "P" and setthe parking brake. If the air conditioning is on,turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out under the caror steam is coming out from the hood, stopthe engine. Do not open the hood until thecoolant has stopped running or the steaminghas stopped. If there is no visible loss ofengine coolant and no steam, leave theengine running and check to be sure theengine cooling fan is operating. If the fan isnot running, turn the engine off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drive belt ismissing. If it is not missing, check to see thatit is tight. If the drive belt seems to besatisfactory, check for coolant leaking fromthe radiator, hoses or under the car. (If theair conditioning had been in use, it is normalfor cold water to be draining from it when youstop).

xgflhma-3.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM4

Page 157: XG350_2005.pdf

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

5IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRESPARE TIRE

D040B01A-AAT

Handling the Spare Tire

Remove the installation bolt to removethe spare tire. To replace the spare tirein its storage compartment, tighten thebolt firmly with your fingers until there isno more play in the spare tire.

HXGS408

Spare Tire Pressure

D040A01L-AAT

The following instructions for the FULLSIZE spare tire should be observed:Check inflation pressure as soon aspractical after installing the spare tire,and adjust to the specified pressure.The tire pressure should be periodicallychecked and maintained at the speci-fied pressure while the tire is stored.

TIRE SIZE

P205/60 R16

94H

COLD TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE

LOAD UP TO

4 PERSONS

MAX. VEHICLE

WEIGHT LIMIT

230KPA, 33PSI

210KPA, 30PSI

240KPA, 35PSI

240KPA, 35PSI

FRONT

REAR

FRONT

REAR

D050A01L-AAT

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

1. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal and let the car slow down whiledriving straight ahead. Do not applythe brakes immediately or attempt topull off the road as this may cause aloss of control. When the car hasslowed to such a speed that it is safeto do so, brake carefully and pull offthe road. Drive off the road as far aspossible and park on firm, levelground. If you are on a divided high-way, do not park in the median areabetween the two traffic lanes.

2. When the car is stopped, turn on youremergency hazard flashers, set theparking brake and put the transaxle in"P".

3. Have all passengers get out of the car.Be sure they all get out on the side ofthe car that is away from traffic.

4. Change the tire following the instruc-tions provided on the following pages.

xgflhma-3.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM5

Page 158: XG350_2005.pdf

36

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

3. Change the flat tire.4. Reinstall the wheel cap by fitting the

boss of the wheel cap in the notch ofthe wheel, hitting the center of thewheel cap with your hand.

HXGS415

D060K02Y-AAT

Wheel Cap (If Installed)

1. Wrap a piece of cloth around the tipof the wrench bar to avoid scratch-ing.

2. Insert a wrench bar into the notch ofthe wheel cap and pry gently toremove the wheel cap.

D060K04L

Notch

D060A01L-AAT

The procedure described on the follow-ing pages can be used to rotate tires aswell as to change a flat tire. Whenpreparing to change a flat tire, check tobe sure the gear selector lever is in "P"and that the parking brake is set, then:

D060A01L

xgflhma-3.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM6

Page 159: XG350_2005.pdf

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

7

D060C01A-AAT

2. Block the Wheel

Block the wheel that is diagonally oppo-site from the flat to keep the vehiclefrom rolling when the car is raised on thejack.

D060B01E-AAT

1. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool

Remove the spare tire and take out thejack and tool bag from the trunk.

NOTE:The jack is located beneath the lug-gage mat in the vehicle trunk.

I100A03L HXG549J

Flat tire

D060D01A-AAT

3. Loosen Wheel Nuts

The wheel nuts should be loosenedslightly before raising the car. To loosenthe nuts, turn the wrench handle coun-terclockwise. When doing this, be surethat the socket is seated completelyover the nut so it cannot slip off. Formaximum leverage, position the wrenchso the handle is to the right as shown inthe drawing. Then, while holding thewrench near the end of the handle, pullup on it with steady pressure. Do notremove the nuts at this time. Justloosen them about one-half turn.

HXGS413

xgflhma-3.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM7

Page 160: XG350_2005.pdf

38

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

! WARNING:Do not get under the car when it issupported by the jack! This is verydangerous as the vehicle could falland cause serious injury or death.No one should stay in the car whilethe jack is being used.

D060E01A-AAT

4. Put the Jack in Place

The base of the jack should be placedon firm, level ground. The jack shouldbe positioned as shown in the drawing.

HXGS402

D060F02E-AAT

5. Raising the Car

After inserting a wrench bar into thewheel nut wrench, install the wrench barinto the jack as shown in the drawing.To raise the vehicle, turn the wheel nutwrench clockwise. As the jack beginsto raise the vehicle, double check thatit is properly positioned and will not slip.If the jack is on soft ground or sand,place a board, brick, flat stone or otherobject under the base of the jack tokeep it from sinking.

HFC4022

Wrench bar

Wheel nut wrench

Raise the car high enough so that thefully inflated spare tire can be installed.To do this, you will need more groundclearance than is required to removethe flat tire.

xgflhma-3.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM8

Page 161: XG350_2005.pdf

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

9

!D060G02Y-AAT

6. Changing Wheels

Loosen the wheel nuts and removethem with your fingers. Slide the wheeloff the studs and lay it flat so it cannotroll away. To put the spare wheel on thehub, pick up the spare tire, line up theholes with the studs and slide the wheelonto them. If this is difficult, tip thewheel slightly and get the top hole in thewheel lined up with the top stud. Thenjiggle the wheel back and forth until thewheel can be slid over the other studs.

WARNING:Wheels and wheel covers may havesharp edges. Handle them carefullyto avoid possible severe injury.Before putting the wheel into place,be sure that there is nothing on thehub or wheel (such as mud, tar,gravel, etc.) that interferes with thewheel fitting solidly against the hub.If there is, remove it. If there is notgood contact on the mounting sur-

!D060G01L

D060G02L

face between the wheel and hub, thewheel nuts could loosen and causethe loss of a wheel. Loss of a wheelmay result in loss of control of thevehicle. This may cause serious in-jury or death.

WARNING:

xgflhma-3.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM9

Page 162: XG350_2005.pdf

310

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

D060I01E-AAT

8. Lower Vehicle and Tighten Nuts

Lower the car to the ground by turningthe wheel nut wrench counterclock-wise. Then position the wrench as shownin the drawing and tighten the wheelnuts. Be sure the socket is seatedcompletely over the nut. Do not standon the wrench handle or use an exten-sion pipe over the wrench handle.

HXGS414

D060H02Y-AAT

7. Reinstall Wheel Nuts

To reinstall the wheel, hold it on thestuds, put the wheel nuts on the studsand tighten them finger tight. The nutsshould be installed with their small di-ameter ends directed inward. Jiggle thetire to be sure it is completely seated,then tighten the nuts as much as pos-sible with your fingers again.

D060H01L

Go around the wheel tightening everyother nut until they are all tight. Thendouble-check each nut for tightness.After changing wheels, have a techni-cian tighten the wheel nuts to theirproper torque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:65-80 lb.ft (900-1,100 kg.cm)

xgflhma-3.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM10

Page 163: XG350_2005.pdf

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

11IF YOUR CAR MUST BE TOWED

D060J01E-GAT

After Changing Wheels

If you have a tire gauge, remove thevalve cap and check the air pressure. Ifthe pressure is lower than recom-mended, drive slowly to the nearestservice station and inflate to the correctpressure. If it is too high, adjust it untilit is correct. Always reinstall the valvecap after checking or adjusting tirepressure. If the cap is not replaced, airmay leak from the tire. If you lose avalve cap, buy another and install it assoon as possible.

D060J01L

D080A01A-AAT

CAUTION:Your car can be damaged if towed incor-rectly!

If your car has to be towed, it should be done byyour Hyundai dealer or a commercial tow truckservice. This will help assure that your car is notdamaged in towing. Also, professionals aregenerally aware of state and local laws govern-ing towing. In any case, rather than risk damageto your car, it is suggested that you show thisinformation to the tow truck operator. Be surethat a safety chain system is used and that allstate and local laws are observed.

!

o OK FOR AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLEEQUIPPED VEHICLE

D080A01L

After you have changed wheels, al-ways secure the flat tire in its place inthe trunk and return the jack and toolsto their proper storage locations.

xgflhma-3.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM11

Page 164: XG350_2005.pdf

312

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

EMERGENCY TOWING

D080C02A-AAT

Towing a Car With Automatic TransaxleD080D01E-AAT

CAUTION:A car with an automatic transaxle shouldnever be towed from the rear with the frontwheels on the ground. This can cause se-rious damage to the transaxle. If the carmust be towed from the rear, a towing dollymust be used under the front wheels.

If the car is being towed with the rear wheels onthe ground, be sure the parking brake is re-leased.

NOTE:Before towing, check the level of thetransaxle fluid. If it is below the "HOT" markon the dipstick, add fluid. If you cannot addfluid, a towing dolly must be used as de-scribed above.

!For emergency towing when no commercialtow vehicle is available, attach a tow cable,chain or strap to one of the towing hooks underthe front of your car. Do not attempt to tow yourvehicle in this manner on any unpaved surface.This could result in serious damage to your car.Nor should towing be attempted if the wheels,drive train, axles, steering or brakes are dam-aged. Before towing, be sure the transaxle is inneutral and the key is in "ACC" (with the engineoff) or in the "ON" position (with the enginerunning). A driver must be in the towed car tosteer it and operate the brakes.

o NOT OK FOR AUTOMATICTRANSAXLE EQUIPPED VEHICLE

o OK FOR AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLEEQUIPPED VEHICLE

HXG552J

D080C01L

D080D01L

xgflhma-3.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM12

Page 165: XG350_2005.pdf

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

13IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS

!D120A01A-AAT

If you lose your keys, many Hyundai dealerscan make you a new key if you have your keynumber.If you lock the keys inside your car and youcannot obtain a new key, many Hyundai dealerscan use special tools to open the door for you.

CAUTION:If the car is being towed with all four wheelson the ground, it can be towed only from thefront. Be sure that the transaxle is in neutral.Do not tow at speeds greater than 30 mph(50 km/h) and for more than 15 miles (25km). Be sure the steering is unlocked byplacing the key in the "ACC" position. Adriver must be in the towed vehicle tooperate the steering and brakes.

xgflhma-3.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM13

Page 166: XG350_2005.pdf

CORROSION PREVENTION &APPEARANCE CARE

4Corrosion Protection ..................................................... 4-2To Help Prevent Corrosion ........................................... 4-3Washing and Waxing .................................................... 4-4Cleaning the Interior ...................................................... 4-5

4

xgflhma-4.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM1

Page 167: XG350_2005.pdf

44 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

2 CORROSION PROTECTION

E010D01A-AAT

Moisture Breeds Corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which corro-sion is most likely to occur. For example, cor-rosion is accelerated by high humidity, particu-larly when temperatures are just above freez-ing. In such conditions, the corrosive material iskept in contact with the car surfaces by mois-ture that is slow to evaporate.Mud is particularly corrosive because it is slowto dry and holds moisture in contact with thevehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, itcan still retain the moisture and promote corro-sion.High temperatures can also accelerate corro-sion of parts that are not properly ventilated sothe moisture can be dispersed. For all thesereasons, it is particularly important to keep yourcar clean and free of mud or accumulations ofother materials. This applies not only to thevisible surfaces but particularly to the undersideof the car.

E010C01A-AAT

High-Corrosion Areas

If you live in an area where your car is regularlyexposed to corrosive materials, corrosion pro-tection is particularly important. Some of thecommon causes of accelerated corrosion areroad salts, dust control chemicals, ocean airand industrial pollution.

E010B01A-AAT

Common Causes of Corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion on yourcar are:

o Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed toaccumulate underneath the car.

o Removal of paint or protective coatings bystones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapesand dents which leave unprotected metalexposed to corrosion.

E010A01A-AAT

Protecting Your Hyundai from Corro-sion

By using the most advanced design and con-struction practices to combat corrosion,Hyundai produces cars of the highest quality.However, this is only part of the job. To achievethe long-term corrosion resistance yourHyundai can deliver, the owner's cooperationand assistance is also required.

xgflhma-4.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM2

Page 168: XG350_2005.pdf

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE 4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

3TO HELP PREVENT CORROSION

E020B01A-AAT

Keep Your Car Clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to keepyour car clean and free of corrosive materials.Attention to the underside of the car is particu-larly important.

o If you live in a high-corrosion area — whereroad salts are used, near the ocean, areaswith industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—, youshould take extra care to prevent corrosion.In winter, hose off the underside of your carat least once a month and be sure to cleanthe underside thoroughly when winter isover.

o When cleaning underneath the car, giveparticular attention to the components underthe fenders and other areas that are hiddenfrom view. Do a thorough job; just dampeningthe accumulated mud rather than washing itaway will accelerate corrosion rather thanprevent it. Water under high pressure andsteam are particularly effective in removingaccumulated mud and corrosive materials.

E020A01A-AAT

You can help prevent corrosion from gettingstarted by observing the following:

E020C01A-AAT

Keep Your Garage Dry

Don't park your car in a damp, poorly ventilatedgarage. This creates a favorable environmentfor corrosion. This is particularly true if youwash your car in the garage or drive it into thegarage when it is still wet or covered with snow,ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contrib-ute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated somoisture is dispersed.

E020D02A-AAT

Keep Paint and Trim in Good Condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should becovered with "touch-up" paint as soon as pos-sible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. Ifbare metal is showing through, the attention ofa qualified body and paint shop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly cor-rosive and may damage painted surfaces in justa few hours. Always remove bird droppings assoon as possible.

E020E01A-AAT

Don't Neglect the Interior

Moisture can collect under the floor mats andcarpeting to cause corrosion. Check under themats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry.Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, clean-ing materials or chemicals in the car.These should be carried only in proper contain-ers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up,flushed with clear water and thoroughly dried.

o When cleaning lower door panels, rockerpanels and frame members, be sure thatdrain holes are kept open so that moisturecan escape and not be trapped inside to ac-celerate corrosion.

xgflhma-4.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM3

Page 169: XG350_2005.pdf

44 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

4 WASHING AND WAXING

If you find any nicks or scratches in the paint,use touch-up paint to cover them to preventcorrosion. To protect the paintwork of the caragainst corrosion, you must clean your Hyundai(at least once a month). Give special attentionto the removal of salt, mud and other sub-stances on the underside of the splashboardsof the car. Make sure that the outlets and theunderside of the doors are open. Paint damagecan be caused by small accumulation of tar,industrial precipitation, tree resin, insects andbird droppings, when not removed immediately.If water alone is not strong enough to remove theaccumulated dirt, use a mild car washing solu-tion. Be sure to rinse the surface after washingto remove the solution. Never allow the solutionto dry on the painted surfaces.

E030A01GK-AAT

Washing Your Hyundai

Never wash your car when the surface is hotfrom being in the sun. Always wash your car inthe shade.

Wash your car frequently. Dirt is abrasive andcan scratch the paint if it is not removed. Airpollution or acid rain may damage the paint andtrim through chemical action if pollutants areallowed to remain in contact with the surface. Ifyou live near the ocean or in an area where roadsalts or dust control chemicals are used, youshould pay particular attention to the undersideof the car. Start by rinsing the car to remove dustand loose dirt. In winter, or if you have driventhrough mud or muddy water, be sure to thor-oughly clean the underside as well. Use a harddirect stream of water to remove accumulationsof mud or corrosive materials. High pressurecar washes may cause water to enter yourvehicle. Use a good quality car-washing solu-tion and follow the manufacturer's directions onthe package. These are available at yourHyundai dealer or auto parts outlet. Don't usestrong household detergents, gasoline, strongsolvents or abrasive cleaning powders as thesemay damage the finish.Use a clean sponge or cloth, rinse it frequentlyand don't damage the finish by rubbing too hard.For stubborn spots, dampen them frequentlyand remove them a little at a time.

To clean whitewall tires, use a stiff brush orsoapy steel-wool scouring pad.

To clean plastic wheel covers, use a cleansponge or soft cloth and water.

To clean cast aluminum alloy wheels, use a mildsoap or neutral detergent. Do not use abrasivecleaners. Protect the bare-metal surfaces bycleaning, polishing and waxing. Because alumi-num is subject to corrosion, be sure to givealuminum alloy wheels special attention in win-ter. If you drive on salted roads, clean thewheels thoroughly afterwards.

After washing, be sure to rinse thoroughly. Ifsoapy water dries on the finish, streaking willresult.

When the weather is warm and the humidity low,you may find it necessary to rinse each sectionimmediately after washing to avoid streaking.

After rinsing, dry the car using a damp chamoisor soft, absorbent cloth. The reason for dryingthe car is to remove water from the car so it willdry without water spots. Don't rub, this candamage the finish.

xgflhma-4.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM4

Page 170: XG350_2005.pdf

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE 4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

5CLEANING THE INTERIOR

E040A01A-AAT

To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery

To clean the vinyl upholstery, first remove loosedirt and dust with a vacuum cleaner. Then applya solution of mild soap or detergent and waterusing a clean sponge or soft cloth. Allow this tostay on the surface to loosen the dirt, then wipewith a clean damp sponge or cloth. If all the dirtstains are not removed, repeat this procedureuntil the upholstery is clean. Do not use gaso-line, solvent, paint thinner or other strong clean-ers.

E030E01A-AAT

Maintaining Bumpers

Special precautions must be observed to pre-serve the appearance of the bumpers on yourHyundai. They are:

o Be careful not to spill battery electrolyte orhydraulic brake fluid on the bumpers. If youdo, wash it off immediately with clear water.

o Be gentle when cleaning the bumper sur-faces. They are made of soft plastic and thesurface can be damaged if mistreated. Donot use abrasive cleaners. Use warm waterand mild soap or car-washing solution.

o Do not expose the bumpers to high tem-peratures. For example, if you have your carrepainted, do not leave the bumpers on thecar if the car is going to be placed in a high-temperature paint booth.

E030D01A-AAT

When to Wax Again

You should polish and wax the car again whenwater no longer beads on a clean surface butspreads out over a larger area.

E030C01A-AAT

Polishing and Waxing

Always wash and dry the car before polishingor waxing or using a combination cleaner andwax. Use a good quality commercial productand follow the manufacturer's directions on thecontainer. Polish and wax the bright trim piecesas well as the paint.

E030B01A-AAT

Spot Cleaning

Don't use gasoline, strong solvents or corro-sive cleaning agents. These can damage thefinish of the car. To remove road tar, useturpentine on a clean, soft cloth. Be gentle.To remove dead insects or tree sap, use warmwater and mild soap or car-washing solution.Soak the spot and rub gently. If the paint has lostits luster, use a commercial car-cleaning polish.

xgflhma-4.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM5

Page 171: XG350_2005.pdf

44 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

6

E050A01A-AAT

Any Questions?

If you have any questions about the care of yourcar, consult your Hyundai dealer.

E040E01A-AAT

Cleaning the Windows

You may use any household window cleaner onthe windows. However, when cleaning the in-side of the rear window be careful not to damagethe rear window defroster wiring.

E040D01A-AAT

Cleaning the Seat Belts

To clean the seat belts, use a cloth or spongewith mild soap or detergent and warm water. Donot use strong detergents, dye, bleach or abra-sive materials on the seat belts as this mayweaken the fabric.While cleaning the belts, inspect them for ex-cessive wear, cuts, fraying or other signs ofdamage and replace them if necessary.

E040C01A-AAT

Cleaning the Carpets

Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Cleaners ofthis type are available in aerosol cans in liquidform or powder. Read the instructions andfollow them exactly. Using a vacuum cleanerwith the appropriate attachment, remove asmuch dirt from the carpets as possible. Applythe foam following the manufacturer's direc-tions, then rub in overlapping circles. Do not addwater. These cleaners work best when thecarpet is kept as dry as possible.

E040B01A-AAT

To Clean the Leather Upholstery(If Installed)

In the normal course of use, leather upholsteredsurfaces will, like any material, pick-up dust anddirt. This dust and dirt must be cleaned off or itmay work into the surface of the leather, caus-ing damage.

Fine leather needs care, and should be cleanedwhen necessary. Washing leather thoroughlywith soap and water will keep your leatherlustrous, beautiful and ensure you have manyyears of wear.Take a piece of cheese cloth and using any mildsoap and lukewarm water, work up a goodlather. Thoroughly wash the leather. Wipe cleanwith a slightly damp cloth and dry with soft cloth.Do this as often as the leather becomes soiled.

During tanning operations, sufficient oils areincorporated through processing that none needbe applied during the life of the leather. Oilapplied to the finished surface will in no way helpthe leather and may do more harm than good.Varnishes and furniture polishes should neverbe used under any conditions.

xgflhma-4.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM6

Page 172: XG350_2005.pdf

Maintenance Intervals ................................................... 5-2Scheduled Maintenance ................................................ 5-4Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions ............. 5-6Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items .............. 5-7

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

5 5

xgflhma-5.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM1

Page 173: XG350_2005.pdf

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

2 MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

F010E01A-AAT

Do-It-Yourself Maintenance

If you are mechanically inclined, own a few toolsthat are required and want to take the time to doso, you can inspect and service a number ofitems. For more information about doing it your-self, see Section 6.

F010D01A-AAT

General Checks

These are the regular checks you should per-form when you drive your Hyundai or you fill thefuel tank. A list of these items will be found onpage 6-3.

F010C01A-AAT

Specified Scheduled Procedures

These are the procedures such as inspections,adjustments and replacements that are listed inthe maintenance charts starting on page 5-4.These procedures must be performed at theintervals shown in the maintenance schedule toassure that your warranty remains in effect.Although it is strongly recommended that theybe performed by the trained technicians at yourHyundai dealer, these procedures may be per-formed at any qualified service facility.It is suggested that genuine Hyundai serviceparts be used for any required repairs or re-placements. Other parts of equivalent qualitysuch as engine oil, engine coolant, auto transaxleoil, brake fluid and so on which are not suppliedby Hyundai Motor Company or its distributor

F010B01A-AAT

Maintenance Requirements

The maintenance required for your Hyundaican be divided into three main areas:

o Specified scheduled procedureso General checkso Do-it-yourself maintenance

F010A01A-AAT

Service Requirements

To ensure that you receive the greatest numberof miles of satisfying operation from your Hyundai,certain maintenance procedures must be per-formed. Although careful design and engineer-ing have reduced these to a minimum, those thatare required are of the utmost importance.It is your responsibility to have these mainte-nance procedures performed to comply withthe terms of the warranties covering your newHyundai. The Owner's Handbook supplied withyour new vehicle provides further informationabout these warranties.

may be used without affecting your warrantycoverage but you should always be sure theseare equivalent to the quality of the originalHyundai parts. Your Owner's Handbook pro-vides further information about your warrantycoverage.

xgflhma-5.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM2

Page 174: XG350_2005.pdf

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

3

F020A02Y-AAT

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCEREQUIREMENTS

o Inspection should be performed any time amalfunction is experienced or suspected.

o Receipts for all emission control systemservices should be retained to demonstratecompliance with conditions of the emissionssystem warranty.

o After 120 months or 150,000 miles (240,000km), continue to follow the prescribed main-tenance intervals.

o For severe usage maintenance require-ments, see page 5-6 of this section.

F010F01A-AAT

A Few Tips

o Whenever you have your Hyundai serviced,keep copies of the service records in yourglovebox. This will help ensure that you candocument that the required procedures havebeen performed to keep your warranties ineffect. This is especially important whenservice is not performed by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

o If you choose to do your own maintenanceand repairs, you may find it helpful to havean official Hyundai Shop Manual. A copy ofthis publication may be purchased at yourHyundai dealer's parts department.

xgflhma-5.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM3

Page 175: XG350_2005.pdf

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

4 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

F030A01A-AAT

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle emission servicesto protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.

DESCRIPTION

EMISSION CONTROL ITEMS

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

FUEL FILTER

FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS

VACUUM AND CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSES

VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGS (PLATINUM COATED)

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

7.5

12

6

R

15

24

12

R

22.5

36

18

R

30

48

24

R

I

I

R

37.5

60

30

R

45

72

36

R

52.5

84

42

R

R

I

60

96

48

R

I

I

R

R

67.5

108

54

R

75

120

60

R

82.5

132

66

R

90

144

72

R

I

I

R

97.5

156

78

R

105

168

84

R

R

I

112.5

180

90

R

120

192

96

R

I

I

R

R

127.5

204

102

R

135

216

108

R

142.5

228

114

R

150

240

120

R

I

I

R

F030B02Y-AAT

R :Replace I : Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.

xgflhma-5.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM4

Page 176: XG350_2005.pdf

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

5

GENERAL ITEMS

DRIVE BELT (ALT, P/STR'G, A/CON)

ENGINE COOLANT

TIMING BELT

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID AND FILTER

BRAKE FLUID

BRAKE HOSES AND LINES

REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER

SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/LOWER ARM

BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT

POWER STEERING PUMP AND HOSES

DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS

AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

F030C03L-AAT

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

No. DESCRIPTION

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

7.5

12

6

I

15

24

12

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

22.5

36

18

I

30

48

24

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

37.5

60

30

I

45

72

36

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

52.5

84

42

I

60

96

48

I

R

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

67.5

108

54

I

75

120

60

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

82.5

132

66

I

90

144

72

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

97.5

156

78

I

105

168

84

I

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

112.5

180

90

I

120

192

96

I

R

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

127.5

204

102

I

135

216

108

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

142.5

228

114

I

150

240

120

R

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

Note :*1. FOR EVERY 12 MONTHS OR 12,000 MILES (20,000 KM), WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST : "R"

See Note *1

xgflhma-5.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM5

Page 177: XG350_2005.pdf

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

6 MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONSA - Repeated short distance drivingB - Extensive idlingC - Driving in dusty, rough roadsD - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials

or in very cold weatherE - Driving in sandy areas

F040A03L-AAT

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriatemaintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

F - More than 50% driving in heavy city traffic during hot weatherabove 90°F (32°C)

G - Driving in mountainous areasH - Towing a trailerI - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, vehicle towing or other commercial use

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGS

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

REAR BRAKE DRUMS / LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS /

LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT

DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID AND FILTER

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER

(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

MAINTENANCE ITEM

R

R

R

I

I

I

I

R

R

VERY 3,000 MILES (4,800 KM) OR 3 MONTHS

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS

EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM)

MORE FREQUENTLY

DRIVINGCONDITION

MAINTENANCE INTERVALSMAINTENANCEOPERATION

A, B, C, F, H

C, E

B, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, E, F, G

C, E, F

A, C, E, F, G, H, I

C, E

xgflhma-5.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM6

Page 178: XG350_2005.pdf

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

7EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

F060J01A-AAT

o Spark plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs of thecorrect heat range.

F060H01A-AAT

o Air cleaner filter

A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter is recom-mended when the filter is replaced.

F060G01A-AAT

o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should beinspected at those intervals specified in themaintenance schedule. Make sure that a newvapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly re-placed.

F060F01A-AAT

o Vacuum, CrankcaseVentilation Hoses

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence ofheat and/or mechanical damage. Hard andbrittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions,and excessive swelling indicate deterioration.Particular attention should be paid to examinethose hose surfaces nearest to high heatsources, such as the exhaust manifold.

Inspect the hose routing to assure that thehoses do not come in contact with any heatsource, sharp edges or moving componentwhich might cause heat damage or mechanicalwear. Inspect all hose connections, such asclamps and couplings, to make sure they aresecure, and that no leaks are present. Hosesshould be replaced immediately if there is anyevidence of deterioration or damage.

F060D01A-AAT

o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and Connec-tions

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connec-tions for leakage and damage. Have a trainedtechnician replace any damaged or leakingparts immediately.

F060C01A-AAT

o Fuel Filter

A clogged filter can limit the speed at which thevehicle may be driven, damage the emissionsystem and cause hard starting. If an exces-sive amount of foreign matter accumulates inthe fuel tank, the filter may require replacementmore frequently.After installing a new filter, run the engine forseveral minutes, and check for leaks at theconnections. Fuel filters should be installed bytrained technicians.

F060A01A-AAT

F060M01A-AAT

o Engine Oil and Filter

The engine oil and filter should be changed at theintervals specified in the maintenance sched-ule. If the car is being driven in severe condi-tions, more frequent oil and filter changes arerequired.

F060B01A-AAT

o Drive Belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts,cracks, excessive wear or oil and replace ifnecessary. Drive belts should be checkedperiodically for proper tension and adjusted asnecessary.

xgflhma-5.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM7

Page 179: XG350_2005.pdf

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

8

F070L01A-AAT

o Suspension Mounting Bolts

Check the suspension connections for loose-ness or damage. Retighten to the specifiedtorque.

F070K01A-AAT

o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler andhangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage.Start the engine and listen carefully for anyexhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections orreplace parts as necessary.

F070J01A-AAT

o Brake Pads, Calipers and Rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs forrun out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

F070H01A-AAT

o Rear Brake Drums/Linings, ParkingBrake

Check the rear brake drums and linings forscoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken parts,and excessive wear. Inspect the parking brakesystem including the parking brake lever andcables. For detailed service procedures, referto the Shop Manual.

F070G02A-AAT

o Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid reser-voir. The level should be between "MIN" and"MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. Useonly hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3or DOT 4.

F070F01A-AAT

o Brake Hoses and Lines

Visually check for proper installation, chafing,cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replaceany deteriorated or damaged parts immedi-ately.

F070E05A-AAT

o Automatic Transaxle Fluid and Filter

The fluid level should be in the "HOT" range ofthe dipstick, after the engine and transaxle areat normal operating temperature. Check theautomatic transaxle fluid level with the enginerunning and the transaxle in neutral, with theparking brake properly applied. Use HYUNDAIGENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SKATF SP III or other brands approved by HyundaiMotor Co., when adding or changing fluid.

F070C01A-AAT

o Coolant

The coolant should be changed at the intervalsspecified in the maintenance schedule.

F060E01A-AAT

o Timing belt

Inspect all parts related to the timing belt fordamage and deformation. Replace any dam-aged parts immediately.

xgflhma-5.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM8

Page 180: XG350_2005.pdf

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

9

F070Q01A-AAT

o Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and connec-tions for leakage and damage. Check air con-ditioning performance according to the relevantshop manual if necessary.

F070P01A-AAT

o Driveshafts and Boots

Check the driveshafts, boots and clamps forcracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace anydamaged parts and, if necessary, repack thegrease.

F070N02A-AAT

o Power Steering Pump and Hoses

Check the power steering pump and hoses forleakage and damage. Replace any damaged orleaking parts immediately. Inspect the powersteering belt for evidence of cuts, cracks, ex-cessive wear, oiliness and proper tension.Replace or adjust it if necessary.

F070M01Y-AAT

o Steering Gear Box, Linkage & Boots/Lower Arm Ball Joint, Upper Arm BallJoint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off, checkfor excessive free-play in the steering wheel.Check the linkage for bends or damage. Checkthe dust boots and ball joints for deterioration,cracks, or damage. Replace any damagedparts.

xgflhma-5.p65 6/16/04, 3:00 PM9

Page 181: XG350_2005.pdf

Engine Compartment .................................................... 6-2General Checks ............................................................ 6-3Checking the Engine Oil ............................................... 6-4Changing the Oil and Filter ............................................ 6-5Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant ................ 6-6Spark Plugs .................................................................. 6-8Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ..................................... 6-9Checking the Transaxle Fluid ..................................... 6-11Checking the Brakes .................................................. 6-12Air Conditioning Care .................................................. 6-14Changing the Conoitioner Air Filter (For Evaporator and Blower Unit) ............................. 6-15Checking Drive Belts .................................................. 6-17Checking and Replacing Fuses .................................. 6-17Power Steering Fluid Level ......................................... 6-20Headlight Aiming Adjustment ...................................... 6-21Replacement of Light Bulbs ........................................ 6-22Bulb Wattage............................................................... 6-31Junction Box Description ............................................ 6-32

Do-It-Yourself Maintenance

6 6

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:58 PM1

Page 182: XG350_2005.pdf

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

2

1. Brake fluid reservoir2. Brake booster3. Windshield washer fluid reservoir4. Power steering fluid reservoir

5. Engine oil filler cap6. Engine oil level dipstick7. Radiator cap8. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick

G010C01L-AAT

ENGINE COMPARTMENT (3.5 V6)

9. Air cleaner filter10. Coolant reservoir cap11. Battery12. Under hood junction box

G010C01L

1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

CAUTION:When inspecting or servicing the engine,you should handle tools and other heavyobjects carefully so that the plastic cover ofthe engine is not damaged.

!

12

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:58 PM2

Page 183: XG350_2005.pdf

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

3GENERAL CHECKS

G020C01L-AAT

Vehicle Interior

The following should be checked each timewhen the vehicle is driven:

o Lights operationo Windshield wiper operationo Horn operationo Defroster, heating system operation (and air

conditioning, if installed)o Steering operation and conditiono Mirror condition and operationo Turn signal operationo Accelerator pedal operationo Brake operation, including parking brakeo Automatic transaxle operation, including

"Park" mechanism operationo Seat control condition and operationo Seat belt condition and operationo Sunvisor operation

If you notice anything that does not operatecorrectly or appears to be functioning incor-rectly, inspect it carefully and seek assistancefrom your Hyundai dealer if service is needed.

G020B01A-AAT

Vehicle Exterior

The following should be checked monthly:

o Overall appearance and conditiono Wheel condition and wheel nut torqueo Exhaust system conditiono Light condition and operationo Windshield glass conditiono Wiper blade conditiono Paint condition and body corrosiono Fluid leakso Door and hood lock conditiono Tire pressure and condition (including spare

tire)

G020A01L-AAT

Engine Compartment

The following should be checked regularly:

o Engine oil level and conditiono Transaxle fluid level and conditiono Brake fluid levelo Coolant levelo Windshield washer fluid levelo Accessory drive belt conditiono Engine coolant hose conditiono Fluid leaks (on or below components)o Power steering fluid levelo Battery conditiono Air filter condition

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:58 PM3

Page 184: XG350_2005.pdf

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

4 CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL

G030D01A-AAT

Adding Oil

If the oil level is close to or below the "LOW"mark, add oil until it reaches the "FULL" mark.

To add oil:

1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counter-clockwise.

2. Add oil, then check the level again. Do notoverfill.

3. Replace the cap by turning it clockwise.

The distance between the "FULL" and "LOW"marks is equal to about 1 quart of oil.

G030A01A-AAT

Engine oil is essential to the performance andservice of the engine. It is suggested that youcheck the oil level at least once a week in normaluse and more often if you are on a trip or drivingin severe conditions.

G030C02A-AAT

To Check the Oil Level

G030B01A-AAT

Recommended Oil

SH, SG or SG/CD (API) multi-grade and fuelefficient oil is recommended.

Before checking the oil, warm up the engine tothe normal operating temperature and be sureyour car is parked on level ground. Turn theengine off.

Wait five minutes, then remove the dipstick,wipe it off, fully reinsert the dipstick and withdrawit again. Then note the highest level the oil hasreached on the dipstick. It should be betweenthe upper ("FULL") and lower ("LOW") range.

G030A02A

G030C01L-1 G030D01L-1

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:58 PM4

Page 185: XG350_2005.pdf

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

5

!

CHANGING THE OIL AND FILTER

! WARNING:Be very careful when draining the engine oilas it may be hot enough to burn you!

G040A01L-AAT

The engine oil and filter should be changed atthose intervals specified in the maintenanceschedule in Section 5. If the car is being drivenin severe conditions, more frequent oil and filterchanges are required.

The procedure for changing the oil and filter isas follows:

1. Park the car on level ground and set theparking brake. Start the engine and let itwarm up until the needle on the coolanttemperature gauge moves above the lowestmark. Turn the engine off and place the gearselector lever in "P".

2. Open the hood and remove the engine oilfiller cap.

G040A02L

3. Slide underneath the car and loosen thedrain plug by turning it counterclockwise witha wrench of the proper size. Be sure that adrain pan is in position to catch the oil as itdrains out, then remove the drain plug.

4. When the oil has stopped draining, replace thedrain plug using a new washer and retighten byturning it clockwise.

Oil pan drain plug tightening torque:3.5 ~ 4.0 kgf.m

5. Remove the oil filter by turning it counterclock-wise with a oil filter wrench of the proper size. Acertain amount of oil will come out when youremove the filter. So be sure to have your drainpan in place underneath it.

6. Install a new oil filter in accordance with theinstructions on the carton or on the filter itself. Donot over-tighten.

Oil filter tightening torque:1.2 ~1.6 kgf.m

Be sure that the mounting surface on the engineis clean and that the old gasket is removedcompletely. Lubricate the new gasket on thefilter with clean engine oil before installation.

7. Remove the engine oil level dipstick.

8. Refill the crankcase with the recommendedengine oil. Refer to the specification in chap-ter 9 for engine oil capacity.

Oil filler cap

Oil filler Drain plug

9. Start the engine and check to be sure no oilis leaking from the drain plug or oil filter.

10.Shut off the engine and recheck the oil level.

NOTE:Always dispose of used engine oil in anenvironmentally acceptable manner. It issuggested that it be placed in a sealedcontainer and taken to a service station forreclamation. Do not pour the oil on theground or put it in with the household trash.

CAUTIONSlowly pour the recommended oil using bya tunnel. Do not overfill not to damageengine.

! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Used engine oil may cause irritation or can-cer of the skin if left in contact with the skinfor prolonged periods of time. Used engineoil contains chemicals that have causedcancer in laboratory animals. Always protectyour skin by washing your hands thoroughlywith soap and warm water as soon as pos-sible after handling used oil.

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:58 PM5

Page 186: XG350_2005.pdf

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6 CHECKING AND CHANGING THEENGINE COOLANT

!Ambient

temperature

°C ( °F)

-15 (5)

-25 (-13)

-35 (-31)

-45 (-49)

65%

60%

50%

40%

35%

40%

50%

60%

WaterAntifreeze

solution

Engine Coolant concentrationG050B01A-AAT

Recommended Engine Coolant

Use a high quality ethylene-glycol coolant in a50/50 mix with water. The engine coolant shouldbe compatible with aluminum engine parts.Additional corrosion inhibitors or additives shouldnot be used. The cooling system must bemaintained with the correct concentration andtype of engine coolant to prevent freezing andcorrosion. Never allow the concentration ofantifreeze to exceed the 60% level or go belowthe 35% level, or damage to the cooling systemmay result. For proper concentration whenadding or replacing the engine coolant, refer tothe following table.

G050B01L

G050A01A-AAT

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. When the engine is hot, theengine coolant is under pressure and mayerupt through the opening if the cap isremoved. You could be seriously burned ifyou do not observe this precaution. Do notremove the radiator cap until the radiator iscool to the touch.

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:58 PM6

Page 187: XG350_2005.pdf

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

7

G050D02A-AAT

To Change the Engine CoolantThe engine coolant should be changed at thoseintervals specified in the vehicle maintenanceschedule in Section 5.

G050C01A-AAT

To Check the Coolant Level

The coolant level can be seen on the side of theplastic coolant reservoir. The level of the cool-ant should be between the "L" and "F" lines onthe reservoir when the engine is cool. If the levelis below the "L" mark, add engine coolant tobring it up between "L" and "F". If the level is low,inspect for coolant leaks and recheck the fluidlevel frequently. If the level drops again, visityour Hyundai dealer for an inspection anddiagnosis of the reason.

G050C01L

CAUTION:Engine coolant can damage the finish ofyour car. If you spill engine coolant on thecar, wash it off thoroughly with clean water.

1. Park the car on level ground, set the park-ing brake and remove the radiator cap whencool.

2. Be sure your drain receptacle is in place.Open the drain cock on the radiator. Allow allthe engine coolant to drain from the coolingsystem, then securely close the drain cock.

3. Check Section 9 for the capacity of thecooling system in your car. Then, followingthe manufacturer's directions on the enginecoolant container, add the appropriate quan-tity of coolant to the radiator.

!

4. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise with-out pressing down on it, until it stops. Thisrelieves any pressure remaining in the cool-ing system. And remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turning counterclock-wise.Now fill the radiator with clean demineralizedor distilled water. Continue to add cleandemineralized or distilled water in small quan-tities until the fluid level stays up in theradiator neck.

G050D01L

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:58 PM7

Page 188: XG350_2005.pdf

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

8 SPARK PLUGS

G060A02Y-AAT

Your engine was originally equipped with plati-num-tipped spark plugs.Platinum-tipped spark plugs will last longer thanconventional type spark plugs and can beidentified by blue lines on the ceramic shell.

NOTE:Do not clean or regap platinum-tipped sparkplugs.

G060A01L

G060B04L-AAT

Replacing the Spark Plugs

The spark plugs should be changed at theintervals specified in the vehicle maintenanceschedule in Section 5 or whenever engineperformance indicates they should be changed.Symptoms that suggest poor spark plug perfor-mance include engine misfiring under load, lossof fuel economy, poor acceleration, etc. Whenspark plugs are replaced, always use sparkplugs recommended by Hyundai. The use ofother spark plugs can result in loss of perfor-mance, radio interference or engine damage.

RC10PYP4 (CHAMPION)

RC10PYPB4 (CHAMPION)

PFR5N-II (NGK)

0.03

9~0.

043

in. (

1.0~

1.1

mm

)

Recommended Spark Plugs:

!

5. Start the engine, top off the radiator withwater and then add coolant to the reservoiruntil the level is between "LOW" and "FULL".

6. Replace the radiator and reservoir caps andcheck to be sure the drain cocks are fullyclosed and not leaking.

G050D02L

WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the coolant fan so thatyou are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases, the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.

(3.5V6)

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:58 PM8

Page 189: XG350_2005.pdf

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

9CHANGING THE AIR CLEANERFILTER

!

NOTE:o Spark plugs should be tightened firmly.

Overtightening can damage the threadsin the aluminum cylinder head. Also,leaving them too loose can cause thespark plug to get very hot and posiblyresult in damage to the engine.

o It is recommended that spark plugs bechanged by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

WARNING:It is recommended that the engine be coolor cold when changing the spark plugs. Ifthe engine is hot, you could burn yourselfon the insulated connector, the spark plugor the engine itself.

G070A02Y-AAT

The replacement of air cleaner filter is per-formed in the following manner.

1. Unsnap the clips around the cover.2. When this is done, the cover can be lifted off,

the old filter removed and the new filter put inits place.

Genuine Hyundai replacement parts are rec-ommended.

CAUTION:Operating your vehicle without a proper aircleaner filter in place can result in excessiveengine wear. When removing the air cleanerfilter, be careful that dust or dirt does notenter the air intake. These may result indamage to the air cleaner filter.

HXG720J

!

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:58 PM9

Page 190: XG350_2005.pdf

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

10

!

FILLING THE WASHER RESERVOIRWINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

G090A01A-AAT

The washer fluid reservoir supplies fluid to thewindshield washer system.A good quality washer fluid should be used to fillthe washer reservoir. The fluid level should bechecked more frequently during inclementweather or whenever the washer system is inmore frequent use.The capacity of the washer reservoir is 3.2 U.S.quarts (3.0 Liters).

CAUTION:o Radiator anti-freeze (engine coolant)

should not be used in the washer systembecause it will damage the car's finish.

o The washer should not be operated if thewasher reservoir is empty. This can dam-age the washer fluid pump.

HXG2007

G080A02A-AAT

The wiper blades should be carefully inspectedfrom time to time and cleaned to remove accu-mulations of road film or other debris. To cleanthe wiper blades and arms, use a clean spongeor cloth with a mild soap or detergent and water.If the wipers continue to streak or smear theglass, replace them with genuine Hyundai re-placement parts or their equivalent.

HEF119

!

CAUTION:o Do not operate the wipers on dry glass.

This can result in more rapid wear of thewiper blades and may scratch the glass.

o Keep the blade rubber out of contactwith petroleum products such as engineoil, gasoline, etc.

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:58 PM10

Page 191: XG350_2005.pdf

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

11CHECKING THE TRANSAXLEFLUID

!

G110A01E-AAT

Transaxle fluid in the automatic transaxle shouldbe checked at those intervals specified in thevehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.

NOTE:Basically automatic transaxle fluid is redcolor. As driving distance increases, thefluid color turns darkish red gradually. It isnormal condition and you should not usefluid color as a criterion for replacing thetransaxle fluid.You must replace the automatic transaxlefluid in accordance with intervals specifiedin the vehicle maintenances schedule insection 5.

G110B05A-AAT

Recommended Fluid

Your Hyundai automatic transaxle is speciallydesigned to operate with HYUNDAI GENUINEATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SPIII or other brands approved by Hyundai MotorCo., Damage caused by a nonspecified fluid isnot covered by your new vehicle limited war-ranty.

G110C01L-AAT

Transaxle Fluid Capacity

The fluid capacity of the automatic transaxle is9.1 U.S. quarts.

WARNING:The transaxle fluid level should be checkedwhen the engine is at normal operatingtemperature. This means that the engine,radiator, exhaust system etc., are very hotso you should exercise great care not toburn yourself during this procedure.

CAUTION:Use of aftermarket ATF additives may causedamage to the automatic transaxle. Onlyuse HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIA-MOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or otherbrands approved by Hyundai Motor Co., Ifyou are having your vehicle serviced at afacility other than a Hyundai dealer, verifyATF is used for your vehicle.

!

G110D03L-AAT

To Check the Transaxle Fluid Level

HXG065

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:58 PM11

Page 192: XG350_2005.pdf

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

12 CHECKING THE BRAKES

! WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the cooling fan, so thatyou are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases, the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.

G110D03Y

Fluid level should be within "HOT" range

4. If the transaxle fluid level is low, use a funnelto add transaxle fluid through the dipsticktube until the level reaches the "HOT" range.Do not overfill.

G120A01A-AAT

CAUTION:Because brakes are essential to the safeoperation of the car, it is suggested thatthey be checked and inspected by yourHyundai dealer. The brakes should bechecked and inspected for wear at thoseintervals specified in the vehicle mainte-nance schedule in Section 5.

While the engine is idling, apply the brakes andmove the gear selector lever from "P" to eachof its other positions -- "R", "N", "D" -- and thento "N" with the engine still idling:

1. Open the hood, being careful to keep hands,long hair and clothing clear of any movingparts.

2. Remove the transaxle dipstick, wipe it clean,reinsert the dipstick as far as it will go, thenremove it again. Now check the fluid level onthe dipstick. It should be in the "HOT" rangeon the dipstick.

3. Return the gear selector to the "P" position.

HXG556J

!

Park the car on level ground with the parkingbrake engaged. When the transaxle fluid levelis checked, the transaxle fluid should be at normaloperating temperature and the engine idling.

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:58 PM12

Page 193: XG350_2005.pdf

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

13

!

G120D01A-AAT

To Check the Fluid Level

G120C02A-AAT

Recommended Brake Fluid

Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming toDOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications in your brakingsystem. Follow the instructions printed on thecontainer.

G120B01A-AAT

Checking the Brake Fluid Level

WARNING:Use caution when handling brake fluid. Itcan damage your vision if it gets into youreyes. It will also damage your vehicle'spaint if spilled on it and not removed imme-diately.

The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir shouldbe checked periodically. The level should bebetween the "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at or below the"MIN" mark, carefully add fluid to bring it up to"MAX". Do not overfill.

HXG095

!

G120E02A-AAT

Adding Brake Fluid

WARNING:Handle brake fluid carefully. It can damageyour vision if it gets into your eyes. Use onlyDOT 3 or DOT 4 specification fluid from asealed container. Do not allow the fluid canor reservoir to remain open any longer thanrequired. This will prevent entry of dirt andmoisture which can damage the brake sys-tem and cause improper operation.

To add brake fluid, first wipe away any dirt thenunscrew the fluid reservoir cap. Slowly pour therecommended fluid into the reservoir. Do notoverfill. Carefully replace the cap on the reser-voir and tighten.

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:58 PM13

Page 194: XG350_2005.pdf

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

14 AIR CONDITIONING CARE

G140D02A-AAT

Checking the Compressor Drive Belt

When the air conditioning is being used regu-larly, the compressor drive belt tension shouldbe checked at least once a month with theengine turned off.To check the drive belt tension, press down onthe belt halfway between the engine crankshaftand compressor pulleys. Pressing with yourfinger, you should not be able to deflect this beltanymore than 1/3 of an inch. If the belt is tooloose, have it adjusted by your Hyundai dealer.

G140D02L

Crank shaft pulleyA/C pulley

Power steering pulley Generator

G140A01A-AAT

Keeping the Condenser Clean

The air conditioning condenser (and engineradiator) should be checked periodically foraccumulation of dirt, dead insects, leaves, etc.These can interfere with maximum cooling ef-ficiency. When removing such accumulations,brush or hose them away carefully to avoidbending the cooling fans.

G140B01A-AAT

Checking the Air Conditioning Opera-tion

1. Start the engine and let it run at a fast idle forseveral minutes with the air conditioning setat the maximum cold setting.

2. If the air coming out of the in-dash vents isnot cold, have the air conditioning systeminspected by your Hyundai dealer.

CAUTION:Running the air conditioning system forextended periods of time with a low refrig-erant level may damage the compressor.

!

G140C01A-AAT

Lubrication

To lubricate the compressor and the seals in thesystem, the air conditioning should be run for atleast 10 minutes each week. This is particularlyimportant during cool weather when the airconditioning system is not otherwise in use.

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:58 PM14

Page 195: XG350_2005.pdf

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

15CHANGING THE AIR CONDITIONERFILTER

G145A02L-GAT

(For Evaporator and Blower Unit)

The air conditioner filter is located in front of theevaporator unit behind the glove box.It helps to decrease pollutants from entering thecar.

G145A02L

G145A03L

G145A01L

B760A08L

1. Open the glove box and take out the damperstrap from the hole.

2. Lower the glove box completely by pushingthe both sides of the glove box inward.

3. Lower the glove box down completely.

4. Turn the knob of the air conditioner filtercover counterclockwise and remove the airconditioner filter cover.

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:58 PM15

Page 196: XG350_2005.pdf

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

16 CHECKING THE FREEPLAY

G170A01A-AAT

CHECKING BRAKE PEDALFREE-PLAY

With the engine off, press down on the brakepedal several times to reduce the vacuum in thebrake booster.Then, using your hand, press down slowly onthe brake pedal until you feel a change inresistance. This is the brake pedal free-play.The free-play should be within the limits speci-fied in the illustration above. If it is not, have itinspected by your Hyundai dealer and adjustedor repaired if necessary.

G160A01E

0.12~0.31 in.(3~8 mm)

G150A01A-AAT

CHECKING STEERING WHEELFREE-PLAY

To check the steering wheel free-play, stop thecar with the wheels pointed straight ahead andgently move the steering wheel back and forth.Use very light finger pressure and be sensitiveto changes in resistance that mark the limits ofthe free-play. If the free-play is greater thanspecified, have it inspected by your Hyundaidealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary.

G150A01L

Maximum1.18 in.(30 mm)G145A04L

!

5. Remove the two air conditioner filters bypulling the knob of the air conditioner filteroutward.

6. Replace the two filters.7. Installation is the reverse order of disassem-

bly.

CAUTION:Be sure to install it with the direction of theair conditioner filter checked.

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:58 PM16

Page 197: XG350_2005.pdf

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

17CHECKING AND REPLACINGFUSES

CHECKING DRIVE BELTS

G180A01A-AAT

CHECKING BRAKE PEDALCLEARANCE

You need a helper to check the brake pedalclearance. With the engine running, have yourhelper press down on the brake pedal severaltimes and then hold it down with a force of about110 lbs (50 kg, 490 N). The brake pedal clear-ance is the distance from the top surface of thebrake pedal to the asphalt sheeting under thefloor mat.If the brake pedal clearance is not within thelimits specified in the illustration, have it in-spected by your Hyundai dealer and adjustedor repaired if necessary.

G180A01L

2.95 in. (75 mm)

G190A01A-AAT

Drive belts should be checked periodically forproper tension and adjusted if necessary. At thesame time, belts should be examined for cracks,wear, fraying or other evidence of deteriorationand replaced if necessary.Belt routing should also be checked to be surethere is no interference between the belts andother parts of the engine. After a belt is replaced,the new belt should be adjusted again after twoor three weeks to eliminate slack resulting frominitial stretching after use.

G140D02L

Crank shaft pulleyA/C pulley

Power steering pulley Generator

G200A01Y-GAT

Replacing a Fusible Link

A fusible link will melt if the electrical circuits fromthe battery are ever overloaded, thus prevent-ing damage to the entire wiring harness. (Thiscould be caused by a short in the systemdrawing too much current.) If this ever happens,have a Hyundai dealer determine the cause,repair the system and replace the fusible link.The fusible links are located in a under hoodjunction box for easy inspection.

G200A01L

BadGood

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:58 PM17

Page 198: XG350_2005.pdf

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

18

1. Turn off the ignition and all other switches.2. Open the instrument panel junction box and

examine each fuse. Remove each fuse bypulling it toward you (a small "fuse puller" toolis contained in the fuse box to simplify thisoperation).

3. Be sure to check all other fuses even if youfind one that appears to have burned out.

4. Replace the blown fuse by pressing a newfuse of the same rating into place. The fuseshould be a snug fit. If it is not, have the fuseclip repaired or replaced by a Hyundai dealer.If you do not have a spare fuse, you may beable to borrow a fuse of the same or lowerrating from an accessory you can tempo-rarily get along without (the radio or cigarettelighter, for example). Always remember toreplace the borrowed fuse.

HXGS416Fuse Puller

G200B01Y-GAT

Replacing Accessory Fuse!

The instrument panel junction box for the lightsand other electrical accessories will be foundlow on the dashboard on the driver's side. Insideinstrument panel junction box you will find a listshowing the circuits protected by each fuse.If any of your car's lights or other electricalaccessories stop working, a blown fuse couldbe the reason. If the fuse has burned out, youwill see that the metal strip inside the fuse hasburned through. If you suspect a blown fuse,follow this procedure:

CAUTION:When replacing a fusible link, never useanything but a new fusible link with thesame or lower amperage rating. Never usea piece of wire or a higher-rated fusible link.This could result in serious damage andcreate a fire hazard.

G200B01L

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:58 PM18

Page 199: XG350_2005.pdf

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

19CHECKING THE BATTERY

!

G210A01A-AAT

WARNING:Batteries can be dangerous! When workingwith batteries, carefully observe the follow-ing precautions to avoid serious injuries.

The fluid in the battery contains a strong solutionof sulfuric acid, which is poisonous and highlycorrosive. Be careful not to spill it on yourself orthe car. If you do spill battery fluid on yourself,immediately do the following:

o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush theaffected areas with water for at least 15minutes and then seek medical assistance.

o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse out youreyes with water and get medical assistanceas soon as possible. While you are beingdriven to get medical assistance, continue torinse your eyes by using a sponge or softcloth saturated with water.

o If you swallow battery fluid, drink a largequantity of water or milk followed by milk ofmagnesia, eat a raw egg or drink vegetableoil. Get medical assistance as soon aspossible.

CAUTION:A burned-out fuse indicates that there is aproblem in the electrical circuit. If you re-place a fuse and it blows as soon as theaccessory is turned on, the problem isserious and should be referred to a Hyundaidealer for diagnosis and repair. Never re-place a fuse with anything except a fusewith the same or a lower amperage rating.A higher capacity fuse could cause damageand create a fire hazard.

!

G200B02L

Good Burned out

!

G210B03A-AAT

Checking the Battery

Keep the battery clean. Any evidence of corro-sion around the battery posts or terminalsshould be removed using a solution of house-hold baking soda and warm water. After thebattery terminals are dry, cover them with a lightcoating of grease.

While batteries are being charged (either by abattery charger or by the vehicle's generator),they produce explosive gases. Always ob-serve these warnings to prevent injuries fromoccurring:

o Charge batteries only in a well ventilatedarea.

o Do not permit flames, sparks or smoking inthe area.

o Keep children away from the area.

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-sories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Batteries also contain other chemicalsknown to the State of California to causecancer. Wash hands after handling.

NOTE:See page 6-32 for the junction box descrip-tions.

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM19

Page 200: XG350_2005.pdf

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

20 POWER STEERING FLUID LEVELCHECKING ELECTRIC COOLINGFANS

!

G250A01A-AAT

FOR MORE INFORMATION ABOUTYOUR HYUNDAI

If you desire additional information about main-taining and servicing your Hyundai, you maypurchase a factory Shop Manual at your Hyundaidealer's parts department. This is the samemanual used by dealership technicians andwhile it is highly technical it can be useful inobtaining a better understanding of your car andhow it works.

G240A01A-AAT

POWER STEERING HOSES

It is suggested that you check the power steer-ing hose connections for fluid leakage at regularintervals. The power steering hoses should bereplaced if there is severe surface cracking,scuffing or worn spots. Deterioration of the hosecould cause premature failure.

G230A01L-AAT

G220B01A-AAT

Checking Engine Cooling Fan

The engine cooling fan should come on auto-matically if the engine coolant temperature ishigh.

G220A01A-AAT

G220C01A-AAT

Checking Condenser Cooling Fan

The condenser coolant fan should come onautomatically whenever the air conditioning is inoperation.

WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the coolant fan, so thatyou are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.

The power steering fluid level should be checkedregularly.To check the power steering fluid level, be surethe ignition is "OFF", then check to make certainthat the power steering fluid level is between the"MAX" and "MIN" level markings on the fluidreservoir.

NOTE:Grinding noise from the power steeringpump may be heard immediately after theengine is started in extremely cold condi-tions (below -4°F). If the noise stops duringwarm up, there is no abnormal function inthe system. It is due to a power steeringfluid characteristic in extremely cold condi-tions.

HXG2006

Recommended FluidUse PSF-3 fluid.

NOTE:Do not start the engine when the powersteering oil reservoir is empty.

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM20

Page 201: XG350_2005.pdf

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

21HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUSTMENT

!

!

G290A03L-AAT

HID Type (If Installed)

Before performing aiming adjustment, makesure of the following.

G290A02L-A

Verticalaiming

1. Keep all tires inflated to the correct pressure.2. Place the vehicle on level ground and press

the front bumper & rear bumper down sev-eral times. Place vehicle at a distance of 118in. (3m) from the test wall.

3. See that the vehicle is unloaded (except forfull levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, andspare tire, jack, and tools). Have the driveror equivalent weight placed in driver's seat.

4. Clean the head light lenses and turn on theheadlights (Low beam).

5. Open the hood.6. Draw the vertical line (through the center of

each headlight) and the horizontal line(through the center of each headlight) on theaiming screen.And then, draw a parallel line at 0.8in.(21mm.)under the horizontal line.

7. Adjust each cut-off line of the low beam to theparallel line with a phillips screwdriver -VERTICAL AIMING

WARNING:If you need headlight aiming adjustment,have your vehicle inspected by your HyundaiDealer.Don't attempt to replace or inspect the HIDheadlight bulb to prevent danger of anelectric shock.

General Type

WARNING:Horizontal aiming should be adjusted by anauthorized Hyundai Dealer.

G290B02L-AAT

Adjustment After Headlight AssemblyReplacement

If the vehicle has had front body repair and theheadlight assembly has been replaced, theheadlight aiming should be checked using anaiming screen as shown in the illustration. Turnon the headlight switch. (Low Beam Position)

1. Adjust headlights so that main axis of light isparallel to center line of the body and isaligned with point "P" shown in the illustration.

2. Dotted lines in the illustration show center ofheadlights.

G290B01L-A

L

W

H

H

Cut-off line

Groundline

"P"

Horizontal lineVertical line0.83 in. (21 mm)

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM21

Page 202: XG350_2005.pdf

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

22

Replacement instructions:

1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye protection.2. Open the engine hood.3. Always grasp the bulb by its plastic base,

avoid touching the glass.

G260A01L-GAT

REPLACEMENT OF LIGHT BULBS

Before attempting to replace a light bulb, be surethe switch is turned to the "OFF" position.The next paragraph shows how to reach thelight bulbs so they may be changed. Be sure toreplace the burned-out bulb with one of thesame number and wattage rating.See page 6-31 for the wattage descriptions.

G270A03L

G270A02L-AAT

HEADLIGHT AND FRONT TURN SIG-NAL LIGHT

High beam Low beam

Turn signal light

! CAUTION:o Keep the lights out of contact with pe-

troleum products, such as oil, gasoline,etc.

o Be sure to replace the LED type equippedbulbs with an assembly.

SPECIFICATIONS:

"H";Horizontal center line of headlights fromground:General type : 24.96 in. (634 mm)HID type : 24.72 in. (628 mm)

"W";Distance between each headlight center:48.8 in. (1,240 mm)

"L";Distance between the headlights and thewall that the lights are tested against:118 in. (3,000 mm)

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM22

Page 203: XG350_2005.pdf

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

23

G270A04L

General type

High beam (H1)Low beam (H7)

Turn signal light

6. Turn the plastic cover counterclockwiseand remove it.

G270A06L

7. Disconnect the power cord from the bulbbase in the back of the headlight.

G270D01L

4. Using a socket wrench of the correct size,remove the headlight assembly mountingbolts.

G270D02L

5. Disconnect the power cord from the back ofthe headlight.

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM23

Page 204: XG350_2005.pdf

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

24

!

G270A08L

12.To replace the front turn signal light bulb, takeout it from the bulb holder and install the newbulb.

1FJB5036

WARNING:This halogen bulb contains gas under pres-sure and if impacted could shatter, result-ing in flying fragments. Always wear eyeprotection when servicing the bulb. Protectthe bulb against abrasions or scratchesand against liquids when lighted. Turn thebulb on only when installing in a headlight.Replace the headlight if damaged or cracked.Keep the bulb out of the reach of childrenand dispose of the used bulb with care.

G270A07L

8. Push the bulb spring to remove the headlightbulb.

9. Remove the protective cap from the re-placement bulb and install the new bulb bymatching the plastic base with the headlighthole. Retighten the bulb spring and recon-nect the power cord.

10.Use the protective cap and carton to prompt-ly dispose of the old bulb.

11.Check for proper headlight aim.

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM24

Page 205: XG350_2005.pdf

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

25

G270I01L-GAT

FRONT FOG LIGHT

G270D01L

1. Remove the headlight assembly mountingbolts.

G270D02L

2. Disconnect the power cord from the bulbbase in the back of the headlight.

G270D03L

3. Take out front fog light from the bulb holderby turning it counterclockwise.

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM25

Page 206: XG350_2005.pdf

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

26

3. To replace the rear combination light (stop/tail light and rear turn signal light), remove itfrom the bulb holder and install the new bulb.

Stop/Tail light

G270B02L

Rear turnsignal light

G270D04L

4. Disconnect the power cord from the bulb.5. Replace with a new bulb.

G270B01L

G270D01L-GAT

REAR COMBINATION LIGHT(Stop /Tail Light and Rear Turn SignalLight)

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Remove the cover on the inside of rearluggage trim by unscrewing the screws.

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM26

Page 207: XG350_2005.pdf

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

27

G270C01L-GAT

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Remove the luggage compartment light coveron the rear package tray panel with a bladescrewdriver.

G270E01L

Screwdriver

2. To replace the back-up light, remove it fromthe bulb holder and install the new bulb.

G270C01L

G270J01L-GAT

BACK UP LIGHT

1. Remove the trunk lid trim.

Back-up light

G270E02L

3. Disconnect the connector.

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM27

Page 208: XG350_2005.pdf

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

28

HTB284

4. Replace with a new bulb. 2. Disconnect the connector.G270F01L

G270E01L-AAT

SIDE MARKER LIGHT

1. Remove the side marker light cover with ablade screwdriver.

G270I01L

Screwdriver

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM28

Page 209: XG350_2005.pdf

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

29

HTB278

3. Replace with a new bulb.

G270G01E-GAT

INTERIOR LIGHT

G270G01L

1. Remove the plastic cover with a flat bladescrewdriver.

Screwdriver

2. Replace with a new bulb.

G270G02L

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM29

Page 210: XG350_2005.pdf

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

30

G270E02L

HTB284

G270K01L-GAT

GLOVE BOX ILLUMINATED LIGHT

1. Open the glove box.

2. Remove the glove box illuminated light coverwith a blade screwdriver.

G270H01L

Screwdriver3. Disconnect the connector.

4. Replace with a new bulb.

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM30

Page 211: XG350_2005.pdf

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

31BULB WATTAGE

Part Name

Head Light (High/Low)

HID Head Light (High/Low) (If installed)

Front Fog Light

Front Turn Signal / Position Light

Side Marker Light

Door Courtesy Light

Front Map Light

Front Overhead Console Light (With Sunroof)

Wattage

55(H1)/55(H7)

55(H7)

55

28/8

5

5

5

5

G280A02L-AAT

Wattage

10

3.2 (LED Type)

5

5

27/8

27

27

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

No.

8

9

10

11

12

13

Part Name

Rear Room Light

High Mounted Rear Stop Light

Luggage Compartment Light

License Plate Light

Rear Combination Light

Stop/Tail Light

Turn Signal Light

Back-up Light

G280A01L-1

1 8

2 3 5 12

9 10 11

13

76

44

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM31

Page 212: XG350_2005.pdf

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

32

G200C01L-GAT

JUNCTION BOX DESCRIPTIONUnder Hood Junction Box

G200C01L

NOTE:Not all junction box description in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspectthe junction box on your vehicle, refer to the junction box label.

G200C01L-1

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM32

Page 213: XG350_2005.pdf

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

33

DESCRIPTION

FUEL PUMP

HEAD LIGHT(Lo-LH)

ABS

INJECTOR

A/C COMPRESSOR

A/T

MAIN

IGNITION COIL

OXYGEN SENSOR

EGR

HORN

HEAD LIGHT(HI)

HEAD LIGHT(Lo-RH)

DRL

FOG LIGHT

DIODE 1

FUSERATING

20A

15A

10A

10A

10A

20A

30A

20A

15A

15A

15A

15A

15A

15A

15A

Fuel pump relay

Head light relay (Low-LH)

ABS controls, Cruise control module, ETS control module

Limp home valve, ETS controls, Injector

A/C relay

A/T control relay, TCM, Engine control relay

MFI controls

Ignition coil, A/T pulse generator, ECM, Ignition failure sensor, E/TCM

ETS relay, MFI controls

A/C relay, MFI controls, EGR solenoid

Horn relay

Head light relay (High)

HID head light relay

DRL control module, Siren

Fog light relay

-

PROTECTED COMPONENTS

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM33

Page 214: XG350_2005.pdf

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

34

DESCRIPTION

SPARE

SPARE

SPARE

SPARE

DIODE 2

BLOWER

POWER FUSE 2

POWER AMP

SUNROOF

TAIL LIGHT

POWER FUSE 1

ECU

REAR DEFOGGER

CONDENSER

POWER WINDOW

IGNITION1/2

ABS 1/2

RADIATOR

FUSERATING

30A

20A

15A

10A

30A

30A

20A

15A

20A

30A

10A

30A

20A

40A

30A/30A

30A/30A

30A

-

-

-

-

-

Blower relay

Fuse 4, 20, 24, 25

Audio amp module

Data link connector, Sunroof relay, Home link connector

Tail light relay

Fuse 1, 7, 17, 18, 19

ETS control module, ECM, E/TCM, Generator

Rear window defogger relay

A/C fan relay #1

Power window relay, IMS controls

Ignition switch

ABS controls

Radiator fan relay

PROTECTED COMPONENTS

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM34

Page 215: XG350_2005.pdf

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

35

G200D01L-GAT

Instrument Panel Junction Box

G200D01L

FUSERATING

25A

20A

10A

15A

10A

10A

10A

15A

10A

10A

20A

10A

10A

10A

20A

10A

15A

10A

20A

PROTECTED COMPONENTS

Power seat

Seat warmer

EPS controls

ETS relay

(HID) Head lights, DRL controls, AQS sensor

Blower & A/C controls

Turn & Hazard controls

Not used

Cruise switch, Instrument cluster

Head light leveling switch, Rain sensor, IMS controls

Rain sensor relay, Wiper & Washer controls

Home link connector, Left (Right) vanity lights, Sunroof,

Blower & A/C controls, Electronic chrome mirror

Not used

Audio

Front (Rear) cigarette lighter, Accessory socket

IMS controls, Driver door module, Rheostat

Not used

Rear for light relay

Stop lights, Left (Right) personal lights,Left (Right) rear door lights

DESCRIPTION

P/SEAT

S/HTR

EPS

ETS

H/LP

A/CON SW

HAZARD

SPARE

CRUISE

IMS

WIPER

ETACS

SPARE

AUDIO

C/LIGHTER

MIRROR

SPARE

RR FOG

STOP LP

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM35

Page 216: XG350_2005.pdf

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

36

FUSERATING

10A

10A

15A

10A

20A

10A

10A

10A

10A

10A

10A

10A

10A

PROTECTED COMPONENTS

Door warning & Ignition key illumination, Courtesy lights

Instrument cluster

SRS controls

Automatic transaxle controls, Back-up light switch,

Vehicle speed sensor

Fuel filler door & Trunk lid opener, Driver (Assister) door module

Multipurpose check connector, Audio, lmmobiilizer controls,

Trip computers, Digital clock, Blower & A/C controls, Instrument cluster

Left (Right) inside lights, (HID) Head lights, Fog light relay,

Right HID turn signal light, Right rear combination light

Stop light failure relay

Immobilizer controls, TCS switch, Trip computers, Instrument cluster

ETACM, Hazard switch, Auto light sensor

Antenna, Blower & A/C controls,

Left (Right) outside mirror motor & Folding motor

(HID) Head lights, Front (Rear) cigarette lighters,

Left (Right) license lights, Left HID Turn signal light,

Left rear combination light

Burglar alarm relay, Transaxle range switch, Start relay, ETS controls

DESCRIPTION

ROOM LP

A/BAG IND

A/BAG

B/UP

T/LID

D/CLOCK

RH TAIL

SPARE

CLUSTER

T/SIG

RR HTD IND

LH TAIL

START

xgflhma-6.p65 6/16/04, 2:59 PM36

Page 217: XG350_2005.pdf

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

7Emission Control System ............................................. 7-2EGR System................................................................. 7-2Catalytic Converter ....................................................... 7-3

7

xgflhma-7.p65 6/16/04, 2:57 PM1

Page 218: XG350_2005.pdf

7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

2 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

H010A02L-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with an emissioncontrol system to meet all requirements of theU.S. Environmental Protection Agency or Cali-fornia Air Resources Board.There are three emission control systems whichare as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system(2) Evaporative emission control system(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function of theemission control systems, it is recommendedthat you have your car inspected and main-tained by an authorized Hyundai dealer in ac-cordance with the maintenance schedule in thismanual.

Caution for the Inspection and MaintenanceTest (3.5 V6 Vehicle with Traction ControlSystem)

After dynamometer testing is completed,erase the ABS/TCS DTC(Diagnotic TroubleCode) with a GST (Generic Scan Tool) or Hi-Scan Pro.

H010B01A-AAT

1. Crankcase Emission ControlSystem

The positive crankcase ventilation system isemployed to prevent air pollution caused byblow-by gases being emitted from the crank-case. This system supplies filtered air to thecrankcase through the air intake hose. Insidethe crankcase, the fresh air mixes with blow-bygases, which then pass through the PCV valveand into the induction system.

H010C01S-AAT

2. Evaporative Emission Control (Includ-ing ORVR: Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery) System

The Evaporative Emission Control System isdesigned to prevent fuel vapors from escapinginto the atmosphere.(The ORVR system is designed to allow thevapors from the fuel tank to be loaded intoa canister while refueling at the gas station,preventing the escape of fuel vapors intothe atmosphere.)

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank areabsorbed and stored in the onboard canister.When the engine is running, the fuel vaporsabsorbed in the canister are drawn into theinduction system through the purge controlsolenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is controlledby the Engine Control Module (ECM); when theengine coolant temperature is low during idling,the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is nottaken into the engine. After the engine warms-up during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens tointroduce evaporated fuel to the engine.

xgflhma-7.p65 6/16/04, 2:57 PM2

Page 219: XG350_2005.pdf

7EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

3CATALYTIC CONVERTER

! WARNING:o Use unleaded fuel only.o Maintain the engine in good operating

condition. Extremely high catalytic con-verter temperatures can result from im-proper operation of the electrical, igni-tion or multiport electronic fuel injec-tion.

o If your engine stalls, pings, knocks, or ishard to start, have your Hyundai dealerinspect and repair the problem as soonas possible.

o Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.Running out of gasoline may cause theengine to misfire and result in damage tothe catalytic converter.

o Avoid idling the engine for periodslonger than 10 minutes.

o The vehicle should not be pushed orpulled to get started. This may cause thecatalytic converter to overheat and cre-ate a fire hazard.

H020A01A-AAT

All Hyundai vehicles are equipped with a mono-lith type three-way catalytic converter to re-duce the carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons andnitrogen oxides contained in the exhaust gas.Exhaust gases passing through the catalyticconverter cause it to operate at a very hightemperature. The introduction of large amountsof unburned gasoline into the exhaust maycause the catalytic converter to overheat andcreate a fire hazard. This risk may be reducedby observing the following:

Catalytic ConverterH020A01L

H010E01Y-AAT

EGR System (If Installed)

This system helps reduce nitrogen oxides byrecirculating a part of the exhaust gas into theengine, thereby reducing cylinder combustiontemperature, which results in lower output ofoxides of nitrogen.

H010D01A-AAT

3. Exhaust Emission Control System

The Exhaust Emission Control System is ahighly effective system which controls exhaustemissions while maintaining good vehicle per-formance.

xgflhma-7.p65 6/16/04, 2:57 PM3

Page 220: XG350_2005.pdf

7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

4

! WARNING:o Do not touch the catalytic converter or

any other part of the exhaust systemwhile the catalytic converter is hot. Shutoff the engine, wait for at least one hourbefore touching the catalytic converteror any other part of the exhaust system.

o Remember that your Hyundai dealer isyour best source of assistance.

o Do not stop your Hyundai over any com-bustible material such as grass, paper,leaves or rags. These materials mightcontact the hot catalytic converter and afire might result.

xgflhma-7.p65 6/16/04, 2:57 PM4

Page 221: XG350_2005.pdf

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............................. 8-2Engine Number ............................................................. 8-3Recommended Inflation Pressures ............................... 8-4Snow Tires .................................................................. 8-10Tire Chains.................................................................. 8-10Tire Rotation................................................................ 8-10Tire Balancing ............................................................. 8-11Tire Traction ................................................................ 8-11When to Replace Tires ............................................... 8-11Spare Tire and Tools ................................................... 8-12Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle .......................... 8-12Consumer Information ................................................. 8-13Reporting Safety Defects ............................................ 8-16

CONSUMER INFORMATION &REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

88

xgflhma-8.p65 6/16/04, 2:57 PM1

Page 222: XG350_2005.pdf

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

2 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (VIN)

I010A02L-AAT

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is thenumber used in registering your car and in alllegal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc. Itcan be found in four different places on your car:

I010A01L-1 1. On the bulkhead between the engine andpassenger compartments.

I010A02L

2. On the left top side of the instrument panelwhere it can be seen by looking down throughthe windshield.

I010A03L

xgflhma-8.p65 6/16/04, 2:57 PM2

Page 223: XG350_2005.pdf

8CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

3

I010A04L

I010A05L

3. On the left center pillar.

4. On the front lower side of the left center pillarouter panel.

TIRE INFORMATION

I020A01A-AAT

The tires supplied on your new Hyundaiare chosen to provide the best perfor-mance for normal driving.

If you ever have questions about yourtire warranty and where to obtain ser-vice, see the tire manufacture's bookletincluded with your vehicle's Owner'sManual Literature Kit.

I010B01A-AAT

Engine Number

The engine number is stamped on the engineblock as shown in the drawing.

I010B01L

xgflhma-8.p65 6/16/04, 2:57 PM3

Page 224: XG350_2005.pdf

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

4

!

RECOMMENDED INFLATIONPRESSURES

I030A03L-AAT

Tire label located on the driver's dooredge gives the cold tire pressures rec-ommended for your vehicle with theoriginal tire size, the number of peoplethat can be in your vehicle and vehiclecapacity weight.

I030A01L

These pressures were chosen to pro-vide the most satisfactory combinationof ride comfort, tire wear and stabilityunder normal conditions. Tire pressuresshould be checked at least monthly.Proper tire inflation pressures shouldbe maintained for these reasons:

! CAUTION:Always observe the following:

o Check pressures when the tiresare cold. That is, after the car hasbeen parked for at least three hoursand hasn't been driven more thanone mile or 1.6 km since startingup.

WARNING:o Lower-than-recommended tire

pressures cause uneven treadwear, poor handling, pour fueleconomy or tire failure.

o Higher-than-recommended tirepressures can cause poor han-dling, uneven tread wear or tirefailure.

I030A01XG

xgflhma-8.p65 6/16/04, 2:57 PM4

Page 225: XG350_2005.pdf

8CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

5

I035A01JM-AAT

CHECKING TIRE INFLATION PRES-SURE

Check your tires once a month or more.Also, check the tire pressure of thespare tire.

How to Check

Use a good quality gage to check tirepressure. You can not tell if your tiresare properly inflated simply by lookingat them. Radial tires may look properlyinflated even when they're underinflated.Check the tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. - "Cold" means yourvehicle has been sitting for at leastthree hours or driven no more than 1mile (1.6 km).Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve stem. Press the tire gage firmlyonto the valve to get a pressure mea-surement. If the cold tire inflation pres-sure matches the recommended pres-sure on the tire and loading information

o Check the pressure of your sparetire each time you check the pres-sure of other tires.

o Never overload your car. Be espe-cially careful about overloading ifyou equip your car with a luggagerack or car top carrier.

o Worn, old tires can cause acci-dents. If your tread is badly worn,or if your tires have been dam-aged, replace them.

label, no further adjustment is neces-sary. If the pressure is low, add air untilyou reach the recommended amount.If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve. Recheck the tire pres-sure with the tire gage. Be sure to putthe valve caps back on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture.

xgflhma-8.p65 6/16/04, 2:57 PM5

Page 226: XG350_2005.pdf

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

6

1. Manufacturer or Brand nameo Manufacturer or Brand name is

shown.2. Tire size (example: P205/60R 16

94H)o The "P" indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles. A"T" is the designation for a tempo-rary spare tire. (If installed)

o Three-digit number (205): This num-ber gives the width in millimetersof the tire from sidewall edge tosidewall edge.

o Two-digit number (60): This num-ber, known as the aspect ratio,gives the tire's ratio of height towidth.

o R: The "R" stands for radial.o Two-digit number (16): This number

is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.o Two (or three) digit number (94):

This number is the tire's load in-dex. It is a measurement of howmuch weight each tire can sup-port.

o H: Speed Rating. The speed ratingdenotes the speed at which a tire isdesigned to be driven for extendedperiods of time. The ratings rangefrom "A" to "Z" (98 to 186 MPH).

3. TIN (Tire Identification Number) fornew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)o DOT: Abbreviation for the "Depart-

ment of Transportation". The sym-bol can be placed above, below orto the left or right of the Tire Identification Number. Indicates tire isin compliance with the U.S. De-partment of Transportation MotorVehicle Safety Standards.

o 1st two-digit code: Manufacturer'sidentification mark

o 2nd two-digit code: Tire sizeo 3rd three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional)o 4th four-digit code: Date of Manu-

facture

Federal law requires tire manufacturersto place standardized information onthe sidewall of all tires. This informationidentifies and describes the fundamen-tal characteristics of the tire and alsoprovides the tire identification number(TIN) for safety standard certification.The TIN can be used to identify the tirein case of a recall.

I030B01L-AAT

TIRE SIDEWALL LABELING

I030B04JM

1

23

4

5, 6

7

1

xgflhma-8.p65 6/16/04, 2:57 PM6

Page 227: XG350_2005.pdf

8CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

7

o Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. Forexample, the numbers 3105 meansthe 31st week of 2005.

4. Tire ply composition and materialThe number of layers or plies ofrubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicatethe materials in the tire, which in-clude steel, nylon, polyester, andothers. The letter "R" means radialply construction; the letter "D" meansdiagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter "B" means belted-biasply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflationpressureThis number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure. Referto the Tire and Loading Informationlabel for recommended inflation pres-sure.

6. Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds thatcan be carried by the tire. Whenreplacing the tires on the vehicle,always use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

7. Uniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required tograde tires based on three perfor-mance factors: treadwear, tractionand temperature resistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform Tire Qual-ity Grading on page 8-14.

I030D01JM-AAT

TIRE TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINI-TIONS

Air Pressure: The amount of air insidethe tire pressing outward on the tire. Airpressure is expressed in pounds persquare inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).Accessory Weight: This means thecombined weight of optional accesso-ries. Some examples of optional ac-cessories are, automatic transmission,power seats, and air conditioning.Aspect Ratio: The relationship of atire's height to its width.Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords thatis located between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made from steel orother reinforcing materials.Bead: The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords that holdthe tire onto the rim.Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in whichthe plies are laid at alternate anglesless than 90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

xgflhma-8.p65 6/16/04, 2:57 PM7

Page 228: XG350_2005.pdf

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

8

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The sideof an asymmetrical tire, that must al-ways face outward when mounted on avehicle.Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit forair pressure.Load Index: An assigned number rang-ing from 1 to 279 that corresponds tothe load carrying capacity of a tire.Maximum Inflation Pressure: Themaximum air pressure to which a coldtire may be inflated. The maximum airpressure is molded onto the sidewall.Maximum Load Rating: The load rat-ing for a tire at the maximum permis-sible inflation pressure for that tire.Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:The sum of curb weight; accessoryweight; vehicle capacity weight; andproduction options weight.Normal Occupant Weight: The num-ber of occupants a vehicle is designedto seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68kg).

Occupant Distribution: Designatedseating positions.Outward Facing Sidewall: The side ofa asymmetrical tire that has a particularside that faces outward when mountedon a vehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bears white letter-ing or bears manufacturer, brand and ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same moldings on theother sidewall of the tire.Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire usedon passenger cars and some light dutytrucks and multipurpose vehicles.Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle manufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure and shown on thetire placard.Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the ply cords that extend to thebeads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.Rim: A metal support for a tire and uponwhich the tire beads are seated.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of airpressure in a tire, measured in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascals(kPa) before a tire has built up heat fromdriving.Curb Weight: This means the weight ofa motor vehicle with standard and op-tional equipment including the maxi-mum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant,but without passengers and cargo.DOT Markings: A code molded into thesidewall of a tire signifying that the tireis in compliance with the U.S. Depart-ment of Transportation motor vehiclesafety standards. The DOT code in-cludes the Tire Identification Number(TIN), an alphanumeric designator whichcan also identify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand and date ofproduction.GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight RatingGAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Ratingfor the front Axle.GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Ratingfor the rear axle.

xgflhma-8.p65 6/16/04, 2:57 PM8

Page 229: XG350_2005.pdf

8CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

9

Sidewall: The portion of a tire betweenthe tread and the bead.Speed Rating: An alphanumeric codeassigned to a tire indicating the maxi-mum speed at which a tire can operate.Traction: The friction between the tireand the road surface. The amount ofgrip provided.Tread: The portion of a tire that comesinto contact with the road.Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,sometimes called "wear bars," that showacross the tread of a tire when only 2/32inch of tread remains.UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards, a tire information systemthat provides consumers with ratingsfor a tire's traction, temperature andtreadwear. Ratings are determined bytire manufacturers using governmenttesting procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The numberof designated seating positions multi-plied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the ratedcargo and luggage loadVehicle Maximum Load on the Tire:Load on an individual tire due to curband accessory weight plus maximumoccupant and cargo weight.Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:That load on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to each axleits share of the carb weight, accessoryweight, and normal occupant weightand driving by 2.Vehicle Placard: A label permanentlyattached to a vehicle showing the origi-nal equipment tire size and recom-mended inflation pressure

I040B01JM-AAT

ALL SEASON TIRES

Hyundai specifies all season tires onsome models to provide good perfor-mance for use all year round, includingsnowy and icy road conditions. All sea-son tires are identified by ALL SEASONand/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tiresidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than all season tires an may bemore appropriate in some areas.

I040C01JM-AAT

SUMMER TIRES

Hyundai specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior performanceon dry roads. Summer tire performanceis substantrally reduced in snow and ice.Summer tires do not have the tire trac-tion rating M+S (Mud and Snow) on thetire side wall. if you plan to operate yourvehicle in snowy or icy conditions.Hyundai recommends the use of snowtires or all season tires on all four wheels.

xgflhma-8.p65 6/16/04, 2:57 PM9

Page 230: XG350_2005.pdf

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

10

!

I050A02Y-AAT

TIRE CHAINS

Tire chains, if necessary, should beinstalled on the front wheels. Be surethat the chains are installed in accor-dance with the manufacturer's instruc-tions.To minimize tire and chain wear, do notcontinue to use tire chains when theyare no longer needed.

WARNING:When driving on roads covered withsnow or ice, drive at less than 20mph (30 km/h).

I060A02A-AAT

TIRE ROTATION

Tires should be rotated every 7,500miles (12,000 km). If you notice thattires are wearing unevenly between ro-tations, have the car checked by aHyundai dealer so the cause may becorrected.After rotating, adjust the tire pressuresand be sure to check the wheel nuttorque.

HEF-241

I040A01S-AAT

SNOW TIRES

If you equip your car with snow tires,they should be the same size and havethe same load capacity as the originaltires. Snow tires should be installed onall four wheels; otherwise, poor han-dling may result.Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa)more air pressure than the pressurerecommended for the standard tires onthe tire label on the driver's door edge ,or up to the maximum pressure shownon the tire sidewall whichever is less.Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120km/h) when your car is equipped withsnow tires.

xgflhma-8.p65 6/16/04, 2:57 PM10

Page 231: XG350_2005.pdf

8CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

11

I090A01A-AAT

WHEN TO REPLACE TIRES

The original tires on your car have treadwear indicators. The tread wear indica-tors appear when the tread depth is 0.06in. (1.6 mm). The tire should be re-placed when these appear as a solid baracross two or more grooves of thetread. Always replace your tires withthose of the recommended size. If youchange wheels, the new wheel's rimwidth and offset must meetHyundai specification.

HGK248

0.06 in. (1.6 mm)

Wear indicator

I080A01A-AAT

TIRE TRACTION

Tire traction can be reduced if you driveon worn tires, tires that are improperlyinflated or on slippery road surfaces.Tires should be replaced when treadwear indicators appear. To reduce thepossibility of losing control, slow downwhenever there is rain, snow or ice onthe road.

I070A01A-AAT

TIRE BALANCING

A tire that is out of balance may affecthandling and tire wear. The tires on yourHyundai were balanced before the carwas delivered but may need balancingagain during the years you own the car.Whenever a tire is dismounted for re-pair, it should be rebalanced beforebeing reinstalledon the car.

!WARNING:

o Do not use the temporary sparetire for tire rotation.

o Do not mix bias ply and radial plytires under any circumstances.This may cause unusual handlingcharacteristics that could result indeath, serious injury, or propertydamage.

xgflhma-8.p65 6/16/04, 2:57 PM11

Page 232: XG350_2005.pdf

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

12 SPARE TIRE AND TOOLS

I100A02E-AAT

Your Hyundai is delivered with the fol-lowing:

Spare tire and wheelWheel nut wrench, Wrench barJack

I100A03L

I110A01A-AAT

SHOP MANUAL

A Hyundai Shop Manual is available from yourauthorized Hyundai dealer. It's written for pro-fessional technicians, but is simple enough formost mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

I120A03A-AAT

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAIVEHICLE

o New vehicle 60 Months/60,000 Miles LimitedWarranty.

o New vehicle 120 Months/100,000 Miles Lim-ited Powertrain Warranty (original owneronly).

o Anti-Perforation Limited Warrantyo Emission Defect Warranty - Federal Vehicleo California Emission Control System War-

ranty (if applicable)o Emission Performance Warranty Federal

vehicleo Replacement Parts and Accessories Lim-

ited Warranty

NOTE:Detailed warranty information is providedin your Hyundai Owner's Handbook.

!WARNING:

o Driving on worn-out tires is dan-gerous! Worn-out tires can causeloss of braking effectiveness,steering control and traction. Whenreplacing tires, never mix radialand bias ply tires on the same car.If you replace radial tires with bias-ply tires, they must be installed insets of four.

o Using tires and wheels of otherthan the recommended sizes couldcause unusual handling charac-teristics that could cause death,serious injury, or property dam-age.

o Wheels that do not meet Hyundai'sdimensional specifications mayfit poorly and result in damage tothe vehicle, including brokenwheel studs.

xgflhma-8.p65 6/16/04, 2:57 PM12

Page 233: XG350_2005.pdf

8CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

13

!

Traction AA, A, B, C - The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wet pave-ment as measured under controlledconditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor traction per-formance.

WARNING:The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on straight-ahead brak-ing traction tests, and does not in-clude acceleration, cornering, hy-droplaning, or peak traction charac-teristics.

I130A01A-AAT

CONSUMER INFORMATION

This consumer information has been preparedin accordance with regulations issued by theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administrationof the U.S. Department of Transportation. Itprovides the purchasers and/or prospectivepurchasers of Hyundai automobiles with infor-mation on uniform tire quality grading. YourHyundai dealer will help answer any questionsyou may have as you read this information.

I130B03A-AAT

Tire Grading

Department of Transportation qualitygrades - All passenger vehicle tiresmust conform to Federal Safety Stan-dards in addition to these grades. Thesequality grades are molded on thesidewall.

Treadwear - The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on the wearrate of the tire when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, atire graded 150 would wear one and ahalf (1 - 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and may departsignificantly from the norm due to varia-tions in driving habits, service prac-tices and differences in road character-istics and climate.

xgflhma-8.p65 6/16/04, 2:57 PM13

Page 234: XG350_2005.pdf

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

14

! WARNING:The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properlyinflated and not overloaded. Exces-sive speed, underinflation, or exces-sive loading, either separately or incombination, can cause heat buildupand possible tire failure.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading - Qual-ity grades can be found on the tiresidewall between the tread shoulderand the maximum section width.

For example:Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tempera-ture A

Temperature A, B, C - The tempera-ture grades are A (the highest), B, andC, representing the tire's resistance tothe generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heat when testedunder controlled conditions on a speci-fied indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-tained high temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerate andreduce tire life, and excessive tempera-ture can lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level of perfor-mance which all passenger car tiresmust meet under the Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard No. 109.Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory testwheel than the minimum required bylaw.

xgflhma-8.p65 6/16/04, 2:57 PM14

Page 235: XG350_2005.pdf

8CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

15

I130D02A-AAT

Hyundai motor vehicles are designed and manu-factured to meet or exceed all applicable safetystandards.

For your safety, however, we strongly urge youto read and follow all directions in this Owner'sManual, particularly the information under theheadings "NOTE", "CAUTION" and "WARN-ING".

If, after reading this manual, you have anyquestions regarding the operation of your ve-hicle, please contact your nearest HyundaiMotor America Regional Office as listed below:

Eastern Region : Connecticut, Delaware, Maine,Maryland, Massachusetts, New Hampshire,New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvanina, RhodeIsland, Vermont, Virginia, West Virginia.

Eastern Region1100 Cranbury South River RoadJamesburg, NJ 08831(800) 633-5151

Southern Region: Alabama, Arkansas, Florida,Georgia, Louisiana, Mississippi, North Caro-lina, South Carolina, Oklahoma, Tennessee,Texas.

270 Riverside parkway,Suite A, Austell, GA 30168(800) 633-5151

Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, Missouri, lowa,Kansas, Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota, Ne-braska, North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio,Wisconsin.

Central Region1705 Sequoia DriveAurora, Illinois 60506(800) 633-5151

Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona, Cali-fornia, Colorado, ldaho, Montana, Nevada, NewMexico, Oregon, Texas, Utah, Washington,Wyoming.

Western Region10550 Talbert AvenueP.O.Box 20850Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850(800) 633-5151

xgflhma-8.p65 6/16/04, 2:57 PM15

Page 236: XG350_2005.pdf

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION & REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

16 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

I130C02A-AAT

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, you shouldimmediately inform the National High-way Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingHYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA. IfNHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if itfinds that a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in in-dividual problems between you, yourdealer, or HYUNDAI MOTORAMERICA.

To contact NHTSA, you may either callthe Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 or write to: NHTSA, U.S.Department of Transportation, Wash-ington. D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motor vehiclesafety from the Hotline.

xgflhma-8.p65 6/16/04, 2:57 PM16

Page 237: XG350_2005.pdf

Measurement ................................................................ 9-2Engine ........................................................................... 9-3Lubrication Chart ........................................................... 9-4

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

99

xgflhma-9.p65 6/16/04, 2:56 PM1

Page 238: XG350_2005.pdf

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

2

J060A01L-AAT

FUEL SYSTEM

J050A01L-GAT

BRAKE

J040A01L-AAT

ELECTRICAL

J020A01L-AAT

POWER STEERING

J010A02L-AAT

MEASUREMENT

191.8 (4875)

70.86 (1800)

55.9 (1420)

108.2 (2750)

60.6 (1540)

60.23 (1530)

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

Wheel base

Wheel tread Front

Rear

Type

Wheel free play

Rack stroke

Oil pump type

Rack and pinion

0 ~ 1.18 in (0 ~ 30 mm.)

5.74 in (146 mm.)

Vane type

Battery

Alternator

MF 68AH (MF)

120A (13.5V)

Dual hydraulic with brake booster

Ventilated disc

Solid disc

Cable operated on rear wheel

Type

Front brake type

Rear brake type

Parking brake

18.5 US.gal (15.4 Imp.gal, 70 Liter)Fuel tank capacity

J030A03L-AAT

TIRE

Tire pressureTire

Standard

psi (kpa)

Size

P205/60 R16 94H

in. (mm)

Front

Rear

33 (230)

30 (210)

xgflhma-9.p65 6/16/04, 2:56 PM2

Page 239: XG350_2005.pdf

9VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

3ENGINE

J070A01L-AAT

ITEMS

Bore x Stroke

Displacement (cc)

Firing order

Valve clearance (warm engine) Intake

Exhaust

Spark plug gap

Idle speed (rpm)

Ignition timing (Base)

Oil grade (API)

3.5 V6

6-Cyl. V-type, DOHC

3.66 x 3.38 in. (93 x 85.8 mm)

213.3 cu. in (3497 cc)

1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6

Auto lash

Auto lash

0.039 ~ 0.043 in. (1.0 ~ 1.1 mm)

700 ± 100

BTDC 5° ± 2°

SH, SG or SG/CD and ABOVE multigrade and fuel-efficient oil

xgflhma-9.p65 6/16/04, 2:56 PM3

Page 240: XG350_2005.pdf

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

4

J080A05L-AAT

LUBRICATION CHART

Oil & Coolant Standard

API SH, Hot Climate : SAE 20W-40, 20W-50 (ABOVE 32°F OR 0°C)

SG or Normal Climate : SAE 10W-30 10W-40, 10W-50 (ABOVE -10°F OR -23°C)

SG/CD Cold Climate : SAE 5W-30 5W-40 (BELOW 100°F OR 38°C)

HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other brands

approved by Hyundai Motor Co.,

Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator

PSF-3 type fluid

DOT 3, DOT 4 or Equivalent

Item

Engine

Transaxle

Coolant

Power steering

Brakes and clutch fluid

Quantity (US.qts) (lmp.qts, liter)

Drain & refill;

Without oil filter : 4.23 (3.52, 4.0)

With oil filter : 4.54 (3.78,4.3)

8.98 (7.48, 8.5)

11.8 (9.8, 11.2)

1.06 (0.88, 1.0)

As required

xgflhma-9.p65 6/16/04, 2:56 PM4

Page 241: XG350_2005.pdf

INDEX

1010

xgflhma-10.p65 6/16/04, 3:01 PM1

Page 242: XG350_2005.pdf

10 INDEX

2

CCare of Cassette Tapes ................................................................. 1-116Cassette Tape Player Operation (H940A) ........................................ 1-98Catalytic Converter ............................................................................. 7-3CD Auto Changer ............................................................................. 1-73CD Auto Changer (H940A, H940C) ......... 1-103 ~ 1-105, 1-112 ~ 1-114Child-Protector Rear Door Lock ......................................................... 1-6Child Restraint System .......................................................... 1-24 ~ 1-30Cigarette Lighter ................................................................................ 1-53Clock ................................................................................................. 1-51Combination Light

Headlight flasher .......................................................................... 1-47Headlight switch ........................................................................... 1-46High-beam switch ........................................................................ 1-47Lane change signal ...................................................................... 1-46Turn signal operation ................................................................... 1-46

Compact Disc Player Operation (H940A, H940C).......................................................... 1-100 ~ 1-102, 1-109 ~ 1-111

Cooling Fans ..................................................................................... 6-20Corrosion Protection

Cleaning the interior ..............................................................4-5 ~ 4-6Protecting your Hyundai from corrosion ........................................ 4-2Washing and waxing ..................................................................... 4-4

Cruise Control ........................................................................ 1-75 ~ 1-77

AAccessory Box .................................................................................. 1-72Air Bag ................................................................................... 1-31 ~ 1-37Air Cleaner Filter ................................................................................. 6-9Air Conditioning

Care ............................................................................................. 6-14Operation ............................................................................ 1-84, 6-14Switch .......................................................................................... 1-82

Antenna ........................................................................................... 1-118Ashtray .............................................................................................. 1-54Automatic Heating and Cooling Control System ................... 1-86 ~ 1-91

BBattery ............................................................................................... 2-13Bi-Level Heating ................................................................................ 1-83Brake

Anti-lock brake system ......................................................... 2-8 ~ 2-9Checking the brakes .................................................................... 6-12Fluid ............................................................................................. 6-13Pedal clearance ........................................................................... 6-17Pedal freeplay .............................................................................. 6-16Practices ........................................................................... 2-10 ~ 2-11

Breaking-In your New Hyundai ........................................................... 1-3Bulbs Wattage ................................................................................... 6-31

xgflhma-10.p65 6/16/04, 3:01 PM2

Page 243: XG350_2005.pdf

10INDEX

3

DDefrosting / Defogging ...................................................................... 1-83Door

Door locks ...................................................................................... 1-4Door courtesy light ....................................................................... 1-74Locking and unlocking front doors with a key ............................... 1-5

Drink Holder ...................................................................................... 1-54Drive Belts ............................................................................... 6-14, 6-17Driving

Smooth cornering ......................................................................... 2-12Winter driving ............................................................................... 2-13

EEmission Control System .......................................................... 7-1 ~ 7-4Engine

Before starting the engine .............................................................. 2-3Compartment ................................................................................. 6-2Coolant .................................................................................. 6-6 ~ 6-7Coolant temperature gauge ......................................................... 1-44If the engine overheats ................................................................. 3-4Number .......................................................................................... 8-3Oil .................................................................................................. 6-4Starting ........................................................................................... 2-4

Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous ................................................... 2-2

FFan Speed Control ............................................................................ 1-79Fog Light

Front ............................................................................................. 1-45Front Seats

Adjustable front seats .................................................................. 1-10Adjustable headrests ................................................................... 1-11Adjusting seat forward and rearward .................................. 1-10, 1-13Adjusting seatback angle .................................................... 1-11, 1-14Lumbar support control ................................................................ 1-12Seat cushion height adjustment .......................................... 1-12, 1-13Seat warmer ................................................................................ 1-16

FuelCapacity ......................................................................................... 9-2Gauge .......................................................................................... 1-43Recommendations ......................................................................... 1-2

Fuel Filler LidRemote release ................................................................. 1-68 ~ 1-69Manual ......................................................................................... 1-69

Fuses ..................................................................................... 6-17 ~ 6-18

GGeneral Checks .................................................................................. 6-3Glove Box ......................................................................................... 1-60

xgflhma-10.p65 6/16/04, 3:01 PM3

Page 244: XG350_2005.pdf

10 INDEX

4

JJump Starting ..................................................................................... 3-3

KKey .................................................................................................... 1-3

If you lose your keys ................................................................... 3-13Positions ............................................................................... 2-3 ~ 2-4

LLubrication Chart ................................................................................. 9-4

MMaintenance Intervals

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ...................... 5-7 ~ 5-9Maintenance under severe usage conditions ................................ 5-6Scheduled maintenance ........................................................5-4 ~ 5-5Service requirements ..................................................................... 5-2

MirrorsDay-night inside rear view ........................................................... 1-61Outside rearview mirror heater .................................................... 1-61

OOdometer .......................................................................................... 1-45Outside rearview mirror .................................................................... 1-60

HHazard Warning System ................................................................... 1-50Headlight Aiming Adjustment ............................................................ 6-21Heating and Ventilation .......................................................... 1-78 ~ 1-85

Air flow control ............................................. 1-80 ~ 1-82, 1-90 ~ 1-91Air intake control ............................................................... 1-79 ~ 1-80Bi-level heating ............................................................................ 1-83Fan speed control ............................................................... 1-79, 1-88Temperature control ..................................................................... 1-82

High-Mounted Rear Stop light ........................................................... 1-68Homelink Mirror ................................................................................ 1-62Hood Release ................................................................................... 1-72Horn .................................................................................................. 1-74

IIgnition Switch ..................................................................................... 2-3Illuminated Ignition Switch ................................................................... 1-4Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ............................................ 1-38Instrument Panel Light Control (Rheostat) ....................................... 1-52Intergrated Memory System (I. M. S) ............................................... 1-14Interior Light

Interior light .................................................................................. 1-58Map light ...................................................................................... 1-58Personal light ............................................................................... 1-59

Intermittent Wiper .............................................................................. 1-49

xgflhma-10.p65 6/16/04, 3:01 PM4

Page 245: XG350_2005.pdf

10INDEX

5

PParking Brake ................................................................................... 1-65Passenger Presence Detection ....................................................... 1-35Power Outlet ..................................................................................... 1-53Power Seat ............................................................................ 1-13 ~ 1-14

Adjusting seat forward and rearward ........................................... 1-13Adjusting seatbag angle ............................................................... 1-14Seat cushion height adjustment ................................................... 1-13

Power Steering Fluid Level ............................................................... 6-20

RRear Window Defroster Switch ......................................................... 1-50Replacement of light bulbs ............................................................... 6-22

SSeat

Front .................................................................................. 1-10 ~ 1-14Seat Warmer ..................................................................................... 1-16Seat Belts

3-Point system .................................................................. 1-20 ~ 1-23Adjustable height ......................................................................... 1-20Adjusting your seat belt ............................................................... 1-22Care of seat belts ........................................................................ 1-19Precautions .................................................................................. 1-17

Spark Plugs ........................................................................................ 6-8Spectacle Case ................................................................................. 1-59Speedometer ..................................................................................... 1-44

Starting Procedure .............................................................................. 2-4Steering Wheel Freeplay .................................................................. 6-16Steering Wheel Tilt Lever ................................................................. 1-75Stereo Radio Operation (H940A, H940C) .... 1-95 ~ 1-97, 1-106 ~ 1-108Stereo Sound System ............................................................ 1-93 ~ 1-94Sun Visor .......................................................................................... 1-73Sunroof ................................................................................... 1-55 ~ 1-57

TTachometer ....................................................................................... 1-44Theft-Alarm system .................................................................... 1-7 ~ 1-9Tires

Balancing ..................................................................................... 8-11Chains .......................................................................................... 8-10If you have a flat tire ........................................................... 3-5 ~ 3-11Information ..................................................................................... 8-3Pressures ....................................................................................... 8-4Rotation ........................................................................................ 8-10Snow tires ...................................................................................... 8-9Spare tire ....................................................................................... 3-5Traction ........................................................................................ 8-11

TowingA trailer (or vehicle) .......................................................... 2-15 ~ 2-18Emergency ................................................................................... 3-12If your car must be towed ........................................................... 3-11

Traction Control System .......................................................... 2-9 ~ 2-10Transaxle

xgflhma-10.p65 6/16/04, 3:01 PM5

Page 246: XG350_2005.pdf

10 INDEX

6

Automatic .............................................................................. 2-5 ~ 2-7Automatic transaxle fluid checking ............................................. 6-11

Trip Computer ........................................................................ 1-51 ~ 1-52Trip Odometer ................................................................................... 1-45Trunk Lid ................................................................................ 1-68 ~ 1-68

VVehicle Identification Number ............................................................. 8-2Vehicle Load Limit ............................................................................. 2-19

WWarning Lights ....................................................................... 1-40 ~ 1-43Power Windows .................................................................................. 1-9Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch .............................................. 1-48Windshield Wiper Blades .................................................................. 6-10

xgflhma-10.p65 6/16/04, 3:01 PM6

Page 247: XG350_2005.pdf

Seoul Korea

Printing: JUN. 11, 2004Publication No.: A39O-EU46FPrinted in Korea

SERVICE STATION INFORMATIONFUEL:UNLEADED gasoline onlyPump Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

FUEL TANK CAPACITYUS.gal (Imp.gal., liter) 18.5 (15.4, 70)

TIRE PRESSURE:See the label on the driver's door edge.

OTHER TIRE INFORMATION:See pages 8-3 through 8-14

HOOD RELEASE:Pull handle under left side of dash.

ENGINE OIL:API grade SH, SG or SG/CD multigrade and fuel efficient oil. Use SAE10W-30, 10W-40 or 10W-50 if normal temperatures are above -10°F(-23°C). For other viscosity recommendations, see page 6-4 or 9-4.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE:Apply the parking brake, with the engine running, shift the selectorlever through all ranges and return to "N" (Neutral) position. Thencheck the level of fluid on the dipstick. Use only HYUNDAI GENUINEATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III OR OTHERBRANDS APPROVED BY HYUNDAI MOTOR CO.,

QUICK INDEXo Car will not start ........................................................................ 3-2o Flat tire ...................................................................................... 3-5o Warning light/chime comes on ...................................... 1-40 ~ 1-43o Engine overheats ....................................................................... 3-4o Towing of your vehicle ............................................................. 3-11o Starting the engine ..................................................................... 2-4o Driving tips for first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) ............................ 1-3o Scheduled maintenance ............................................................. 5-4o Reporting safety defects ............................................................ 8-16

xgflhma-11.p65 6/16/04, 3:14 PM2